初一英语学案上

初一英语学案上

盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit1-1‎ 学习 内容 Unit 1 Hello ! welcome to the unit ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 日常见面时打招呼用语：Hi !你好！ Good morning !早上好！ ‎ Goodbye ! 再见！ Bye!（=Bye-bye！）再见！‎ 学习 重难点 日常见面时打招呼用语的使用 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 请给下列情境在课文中找到相应的问候语。‎ ‎1.当你早上遇到老师和同学，你应该说：______________________________ ‎ ‎2.当有人用Hi向你打招呼时，你应该回答 ：_____________________________‎ ‎3.当有人对你说“再见”时，你应该说：__________________________________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 请给下列对话选出正确的应答语。‎ ‎（ ）1. --- Good morning , Xiao Wang . --- ______ .‎ A Thank you! B Good morning! C Hi, Tom D Goodbye , Tom ‎ ‎( ) 2. --- _______ . --- Hi ,Lin Tao .‎ A Hi , Ben B Goodbye，Ben C Sit down , please D Thank you, Ben ‎( ) 3.--- Goodbye , Alice . --- ________ , Jack .‎ A Hello B Good morning C Bye-bye D Hi ‎ ‎( ) 4. 跟别人告别时，不能说 _____‎ A. Goodbye! B. Bye! C. Good morning! ‎ ‎( ) 5.Hello , ______ Zhang .‎ ‎ A. Miss B. Teacher C. miss ‎ 活动二: 要点点击 1. Hi 的意思是“ 嗨”，“喂”，相当于Hello 。一般可用作熟人、亲朋好友之间的打招呼用语，语气比较随便。Hi 也可以用以引起别人的注意，常用在打电话或者路上遇见熟人时，相当于汉语中的“喂”。‎ 2. Goodbye是与人告别时的用语，相当于Bye-bye、Bye ,只是Goodbye比较正式。如果只是暂时分别，我们可以说：“See you（around）”。其实跟朋友道别的句子还有很多，如“See you later .”、“See you again soon .”、“ Catch you later .”等等。‎ 3. Good morning 是早晨或上午你碰到别人时所用的问候语。Good morning 比较正式，可对老师，同学或关系一般的人使用，回答还用这句话。较熟悉的人之间可用morning !‎ 活动三：分组表演对话 检 测 板 块 一、补全下列对话。‎ ‎1.--- __________ , Han Mei .‎ ‎--- Good morning , Xiao Ming .‎ ‎2. --- Hi , Nick . --- _______ , Tom .‎ ‎3. --- ___________, Miss Wang . --- Bye !‎ 二、找出下列问候语中的错误并改正。‎ ‎1.Good morning , Gao Miss .‎ ‎2.Wang Fang , Hello !‎ 三、选一选　从B栏中选出与A栏相对应的答句，把答案写在题前括号内 ‎ A B ‎ 1. ( ) Good bye! A. Good morning, Millie.‎ ‎ 2. ( ) Hi, Nick! B. Good evening.‎ ‎ 3. ( ) Good morning, Miss Fang. C. Bye!‎ ‎ 4. ( ) Good evening. D. Hi, Lily.‎ 延 伸 板 块 一天中问好的方式有哪些?(根据时间不同)‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit 1-2‎ 学习 内容 Unit1 Hello ! Listening and Speaking 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 1. 问候语：Good afternoon ! How are you! ‎ I’m fine .Thank you! ‎ 2. 问答姓名方式：What’s your name ? I’m ……‎ 学习 重难点 问候语及问答姓名方式 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 请给下列情境选择正确的问候语。‎ ‎1.当在下午见面时，你说：___________________________________‎ ‎2. 向别人问好时，你可以说：___________________________________‎ ‎3. 问某人是否是Jill时 ，你可以说：___________________________________‎ ‎4.问某人的姓名时，你可以说：___________________________________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 请从课本中找到下列句子相应的英文翻译。‎ ‎1 早上好。___________________ 2 下午好。__________________‎ ‎3 你好吗？___________________ 4 我很好。___________________‎ ‎5.谢谢。___________________ 6 你叫什么名字？___________________‎ ‎7 你是Jill对吗？___________________8 是的，我是的 。___________________‎ 活动二: 要点点击 1. How are you?的回答一般是肯定，它 的不同回答有: Fine, thank you./ I'm fine , thank you./ Not bad, thank you./I'm OK/very well/all right. 如果身体状况确实不好，我们可以说：Not so good.如果第二人称接着问候第一个人的身体情况时，可以说：“Fine, thank you. And you?”（很好，谢谢，你怎么样？），第一个人答：“I'm fine, too.”（我也很好。）注意：Fine是I'm fine的简略形式，在口语中常用Fine来代替I'm fine.但在“I'm fine, too.”一句中，“I'm”一般不省。Fine一词是“身体好”的意思。I'm fine.有时可以说成“I'm OK.”等其它形式，OK比fine随便一些，注意OK两个字母均须大写。I'm是I am的缩写。‎ 2. ‎“And you?”是“And how are you?”的简略形式，由于第二人问的是一个相同的问题，因此可以用“And you?”，以避免重复。‎ 3. Thank you.=Thanks.‎ 1. What's your name? 有两种回答：I'm xxx../My name is xxx.‎ 2. I’m Millie . 我是米莉。这句话是自我介绍，也可以说“My name is Millie .” ‎ 活动三：分组表演对话 检 测 板 块 补全下列对话。‎ ‎(一)‎ ‎1 --- ________ are you ? ‎ ‎--- ________ ________ , thank you . _________ you ? ‎ ‎2 --- What’s your name ？‎ ‎--- ________ ________ is Xiao Lin./ I __________ Xia Lin . ‎ ‎3 --- ________ afternoon , class . ‎ ‎--- ________ _______ , Miss Zhang .‎ ‎--- Sit down , please . ‎ ‎--- You _______ Lily , right ? ‎ ‎--- No . I’m Lucy . ‎ ‎（二）‎ ‎ A: You ________ Andy, _______?‎ ‎ B: _______, I _______Kate. _______ your _______, please?‎ ‎ A: My________ ______ Liu Min. ________are you?‎ ‎ B: _______ , thanks.‎ ‎ (三)‎ ‎ A: Good morning.‎ ‎ B: _______ _______!‎ ‎ A: Excuse me, ________ _______ Jim Green?‎ ‎ B: _______, _______ _______. I _______ Jack Green.‎ ‎ A: Oh, _______.‎ ‎ B: That’s ________.‎ 延 伸 板 块 ‎1. 对女性和男性的称呼如下；对未婚女性我们称Miss xxx, 而对已婚和不明婚姻状况的女性分别称Mrs xxx and Ms xxx.，并将Mr，Mrs或Miss放在姓之前。如：Good evening, Mr. Yang.‎ ‎2. 一些词的缩写和完全形式：I'm=I am, What's=What is, You're=You are, He's=He is, She's=She is, They're=They are, It's=It is 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit 1-3‎ 学习 内容 Unit 1 Hello ! Reading ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1. 简单的自我介绍：Hello ! I’m ..... What’s your name ?‎ ‎2. 复习巩固所学的日常问候语。‎ 学习 重难点 自我介绍及所学的日常问候语的运用 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 句子配对。（从II栏中选出适合I栏的答语）‎ I II ‎( )1. Good afternoon, class A. Yes, I am.‎ ‎( )2. Hello! B. Fine, thank you.‎ ‎( )3. Sit down, please. C. Good afternoon.‎ ‎( )4. What’s your name? D. Hello.‎ ‎( )5. How are you? E. Thank you.‎ ‎( )6. Are you Jim? F. Wei Hua.‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 I’m fine , too . ‎ And you ?‎ How are you ? ‎ Hello . ‎ I’m Wei Hua .‎ 从所给的选项中选出适当的句子补全对话。‎ ‎--- ______1_____ I’m Mr Li .‎ ‎ --- Good morning ! Mr Li . _____2_____ ‎ ‎--- ______3______ ‎ ‎--- Fine , thanks . ____4_____ ‎ ‎--- _____5_____‎ 活动二: 要点点击 Hello ! I’m Mrs Wang . 你好! 我是王太太 。‎ Mr, Mrs, Miss分别是先生太太小姐的意思。这三个词都可以用于姓和姓名之前，前两个一般不单独使用。Mr是mister 的缩写形式，可用于一切男性；Mrs是mistress 的缩写形式，只限用于已婚女子的姓氏或姓名之前。Miss一般用于未婚女子，在一些学校用作学生对女老师（无论已婚未婚）的称呼。现在还常用Ms表示“女士”。‎ 活动三：分组朗读、表演对话。‎ 检 测 板 块 选择合适的单词完成句子 A. you’re B. morning C. Hi D. right E. too F. am G. How H. I’m ‎ ‎ I.‎ name J. And ‎ ‎1.— Hello, what’s your _____? —_______Millie.‎ ‎2.—You’re Andy, _____？ —Yes, I _____.‎ ‎3.—Good morning, Miss Zhou. —Good _____, Mrs. Wang.‎ ‎4.—_____are you? —I’m fine. Thank you. ____ you? —I’m fine, ____.‎ ‎5.—Hi,_____ Millie, right? —No, I’m Nick.‎ ‎6.—Hi, Andy. —_____, Millie.‎ 单项选择 ‎ （ ）1.Andy早上见到老师时,要说_______‎ ‎ A. Good morning B. Good afternoon C. Goodbye ‎ （ ）2.Kate上学时见到Nick,对他说______.‎ ‎ A. Hi, Nick B. Hi, Kate C. Goodbye Nick.‎ ‎ （ ）3.Lucy到校与老朋友Lily问候, 说_______.‎ ‎ A. Hi, I’m Lucy. B. Goodbye, Lily C. How are you, Lily?‎ ‎ （ ）4.Jill 下午见到老师,说_______.‎ ‎ A. Good morning B. Good afternoon C. Goodbye ‎ （ ）5.下午老师询问Tom的身体状况, Tom 回答________.‎ ‎ A. Good afternoon B. I’m fine C. I’m fine, too.‎ ‎ （ ）6.放学了,同学们要跟老师说_______. ‎ ‎ A. Good morning B. Good afternoon C. goodbye ‎ （ ）7.—You’re Peter, right? —______.‎ ‎ A. Yes, I am B. No, I am C. Yes, I’m ‎ （ ）8.—______ is she? —She’s fine. A. What B. How C. What’s ‎ ‎ （ ）9.—You’re very clever(聪明) —______.‎ ‎ A. Good B. Thank you C. You’re right ‎ （ ）10.—_____? —I’m fine. Thank you.‎ ‎ A. How are you B. How old are you C. What’s your name ‎ （ ）11.—你若想知道别人的名字,你可以说: _____‎ ‎ A. Hello, What’s you name? B. Hello, your name is what?‎ ‎ C. Hello, what’s your name? ‎ ‎ ( ) 12.—若别人对你说 “How are you?” 你应该回答：_____‎ ‎ A. I’m fine, thank you. B. I’m fine, too. C. How are you? ‎ ‎( ) 13.你若想知道别人的名字,你可以说: _____‎ A. Hello, What’s your name? B. Hello, your name is what?C. Hello, what’s you name? ‎ ‎( ) 14.若别人对你说 “How are you?” 你应该回答_____‎ ‎ A. I’m fine, thank you. B. I’m fine, too. C. How are you?‎ 延 伸 板 块 句型转换 ‎ ‎1.I’m Linda.(改为一般疑问句并作肯定回答。)‎ ‎_______ _______ Linda? _______, ______ ______.‎ ‎ 2.My name is Hu Wangnian.(就画线部分提问)_______ _______ _______name?‎ ‎ 3.I’m fine. (就画线部分提问)_______ _______ you?‎ ‎4. zhang , good , Mr , morning, （连词成句，注意大小写。）‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit 1-4‎ 学习内容 Unit 1 Hello ! The alphabet and Task 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学习字母Aa-Nn 的正确读音和写法。‎ ‎2 了解一些表示特定意义的字母组合。‎ ‎3 在猜测游戏中学会使用一些日常问候语与别人打招呼。‎ 学习 重难点 字母Aa - Nn 的正确读音和写法 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 ‎1 请你辨一辨下列字母的异同。‎ IJ LI EH ED GC EK ‎ Il bd mn ae cn hk ‎2 有时我们常用一些字母代表特定的意思，你能说出几个吗 ？‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 ‎1.请写出所给字母相应的大、小写形式，读一读，想一想它们的含义。‎ ‎1 cd ________ 2 AM ________ 3 id _______ ‎4 KG _______ 5 ad _______‎ ‎6 hk ________ ‎7 KM _______ 8 bc ________ 9 caac _______ 10 abc _____‎ ‎2. 字母 ‎ A.写出所给字母相应的大、小写形式。‎ ‎1.gh______ 2.ED________ 3.fi________ 4.abc________ 5.JK_______ 6.ibm______ 7.A.M.________ 8.cd_____ 9.kfc_______ 10.KG______‎ B. 请按首字母顺序排列下列单词(只填序号)。‎ ‎1.bye 2. name 3. is 4. hello 5. are 6. how 7. no 8. Miss ‎ _________________________________________________________________‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1 找出读音中有相同音素的各组字母。‎ ‎（ ）1. Aa Ff ( ) 2. Dd Cc ( ) 3. Bb Dd ‎ ( ) 4. Gg Ee ( )5. Bb Cc ( ) 6. Ff Gg ‎2 从下列每组字母中找出与所给字母有相同发音的字母。‎ ‎1. A (1 ) D (2) G (3) K ( )‎ ‎2. E (1) C (2) H (3) M ( ) ‎ ‎3. F (1) F (2) J (3) L ( )‎ ‎4. K (1) D (2) G (3) J ( )‎ 活动三：‎ ‎1、写出下列字母左右相邻的字母。‎ ‎1.____E____ 2.____C_____ 3.____F_____ 4.____B____‎ ‎2、说出下列字母所代表的意义。‎ ABC________ BC________ BBC________ AD________ CAAC________ a.m.________‎ ‎3、根据字母表的顺序写出下列字母。‎ J L B G E A F M I D C H K N ____________________________________________________‎ 检 测 板 块 情景交际。‎ A)从II栏中选出与I栏相对应的句子。‎ ‎ I II ‎（ ）1. Let’s play a game. A. Yes, I am.‎ ‎（ ）2. What’s your name? B. Nick.‎ ‎（ ）3. You’re Lily, right? C. I’m fine.‎ ‎（ ）4. How are you? D. Nice to meet you, too.‎ ‎（ ）5. How do you do? E. OK.‎ ‎（ ）6. Nice to meet you! F. That’s OK.‎ ‎（ ）7. Thank you. G. Goodbye.‎ ‎（ ）8. Goodbye. H. They are my classmates ‎（ ）9. Is she your mother? I. How do you do?‎ ‎（ ）10. Who are they? J. No, she isn’t.‎ B）从下列方框中选出所缺句子，将其序号填入横线上。‎ A: Hi, good morning! ‎ B: 11 Andy. ‎ A: How are you today? ‎ B: 12 , thank you. 13 ‎ A: 14 ‎ B: Goodbye, Andy. ‎ A: 15 ‎ ‎ ‎ A. Goodbye. B. And you? C. Good morning! ‎ ‎ D. I’m fine. E. I’m fine, too. ‎ 延 伸 板 块 理解一些词的缩写含义：HK, CD, a.m., kg, km, mm, ID, KFC, NBA, MBA, LG, BBC, ABC, AD, BC, BA, BEC, CAAC, CBA, CBC, OK 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit2-1‎ 学习 内容 Unit2 My family Welcome to the unit 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 掌握生词：sister brother twin dog cat this my he ‎ ‎2 学会使用This is... , She / He is my ... 句型来介绍他人。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 生词：sister brother twin dog cat this my he ‎ ‎2 介绍他人的句型：This is... , She / He is my ...‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 想一想，一个家庭可能有哪些成员？ 你能说出几个表示家庭成员的单词吗？‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 看课文，找出与下面短语相对应的中文或英文。‎ ‎1 双胞胎姐妹 ________________ 2 你的哥哥（弟弟）____________________ ‎ ‎3 我的妹妹（姐姐）___________ 4 我的猫 ___________________‎ ‎5 你的狗 ____________________ 6 twin brother _____________________‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1 This is Sally . She is my sister .这是萨莉，她是我的姐姐。‎ ‎“This is ….”这是英语中用于介绍人或物的常用句型。当说话人要把一个人介绍给另一个人时，常用“This is … ”这一句型，而不用 “He is … ”或 “She is … ” 。如：This is Jill and that is Lily. 这位是吉尔，那位是莉莉。‎ ‎2 中国人的名字用汉语拼音，若是单名两个字，则用两个字的首字母都要大写，如：Li Lei 。若是双名三个字，后两个字写在一起，姓名的第一个字母都要大写，如：Zhang Lili 。中国人名通常是姓在前面而名在后，但英国人名正好相反，是名在前而姓在后，如：Jim Green，Ann Read，其中Jim和Ann是名，而Green和Read则为姓。因而在书写中文名时一定要注意。‎ ‎3 He is my twin brother . 他是我的双胞胎哥哥。‎ He 是人称代词，指代男性第三人称单数；she 也是人称代词，指代女性第三人称单数。指代物的第三人称单数“它”是it . 但是，现在人们一般把宠物狗、猫当作自己的家庭成员之一，因此也可以用he 或she 来指代，而不用it 。‎ 检 测 板 块 ‎(一)根据中文完成下列句子。‎ ‎1 你好，这是我的好朋友Jack . ‎ Hello ! __________ _________ my good friend , Jack .‎ ‎2 他是你的双胞胎兄弟吗？‎ ‎_________ he your ___________ _____________ ? ‎ ‎3 我们是双胞胎姐妹。 ‎ We _______ _________ _____________ .‎ ‎4 这是我的猫。This is _____________ ____________ .‎ ‎5 那是你的狗。 That is ____________ ____________ .‎ ‎6 这位是Lily ,她是我的孪生姐妹。‎ ‎________ is Lily . ________ ________ my _________ ________.‎ ‎（二）阅读下列短文，回答后面的问题。‎ ‎ I am a girl. My name is Alice. My Chinese name is Xiao Hong. I am a student. My father’s name is Jack and my mother’s ‎ name is Jean. My father is a teacher. My mother is a nurse. We all work hard.‎ ‎1. What’s the girl’s English name? ‎ ‎ _____________________________________‎ ‎2. Is Jack the girl’s father? ‎ ‎ _____________________________________‎ ‎3. What’s her father? ‎ ‎ _____________________________________‎ ‎4. Who’s the girl’s mother? ‎ ‎ _____________________________________‎ ‎5. Is girl’s mother a teacher? ‎ ‎____________________________________‎ 延 伸 板 块 ‎1 找一张家人的合影照，用 This is ... , He / She is ... , His / her name is...把你的家庭成员介绍给你的朋友。‎ ‎2 写出下列词语的缩写形式：‎ ‎1. I am = ________ 2. you are ________ 3. what is _____4. who is ________ 5. he is ________ 6. she is ______7. it is ________ 8. what is ________‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit2-2‎ 学习 内容 Unit2 My family Listening and speaking 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学会更多表示家庭成员的一些词汇。‎ ‎2 初步学会用What is it ? It is ... 句型来谈论物品， 用 Who is he / she ?‎ He / She is ... 句型来谈论人 。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 表示家庭成员的一些词汇 ‎2 用What is it ? It is ... 句型来谈论物品， 用 Who is he / she ?‎ He / She is ... 句型来谈论人 。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 在课文中找出相关的单词填空。‎ ‎1 The father of your father / mother is your ____________‎ ‎2 The mother of your father / mother is your ____________‎ ‎3 The brother of your father / mother is your ____________‎ ‎4 The sister of your father / mother is your ____________ ‎ ‎5 The son of your father’s or mother’s brother’s or sister’s is ‎ your ____________‎ ‎6 The daughter of your father’s or mother’s brother’s or sister’s ‎ is your ____________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 用英语来表达下列句子。‎ ‎1 它是什么？_________________________________‎ ‎2 这是什么？_________________________________‎ ‎3 她是谁？_________________________________‎ ‎4 他是谁？_________________________________‎ ‎5 他是你的爸爸吗？_________________________________‎ 不，他是我的叔叔。_________________________________‎ ‎6 她是你的姑姑吗？_________________________________‎ 是的，她是。_________________________________‎ ‎7. 谁是你的孪生兄弟，Andy 还是Peter?‎ ‎ ____ _____ _____ _____ ______, Andy or Peter?‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1 Who is he / she ? 他/她是谁？‎ Who是疑问代词，引导特殊疑问句，主要用于对人物进行提问。‎ ‎2 What is it ？ 它是什么？‎ What 是疑问代词，引导特殊疑问句，主要用于对物进行提问。‎ （1） 用于对姓名提问，例如：What’s your name ? I’m Lily .‎ （2） 用于对事物提问，例如：What is it ? It’s a photo of my family .‎ （3） 用于对职业提问，例如: What’s your father ? He’s a teacher .‎ ‎3 It’s a photo of my family. 它是我家的一张全家福。‎ ‎（1）it’s是it is的缩写形式，意思是“它是”。注意不要写成its。。‎ ‎（2）a photo of … 一张……的照片，of 表示所属关系。如：‎ a photo of Cousin Tony 托尼表弟的一张照片 a photo of my mother 我妈妈的一张照片 ‎4 Aunt Mary 在英文中，专有名词要大写。这儿A和M都要大写。对某某叔叔，某某阿姨，某某堂兄妹的正确称呼分别是：Uncle Xxx, Aunt Xxx, Cousin Xxx。需注意的是称呼和姓或名首字母都要大写。‎ 检 测 板 块 一、 选择正确的答语完成句子。‎ ‎1 --- ________ is he ? --- He’s my father . ‎ A Who B What C How ‎ ‎2 --- What’s your name ? --- __________ .‎ A Sister B My father C Bob ‎ ‎3 --- Who is he ? --- _________ ‎ A Aunt Mary B Mary Aunt C Cousin Tony ‎ ‎4 This is Kate . She is ________ sister . ‎ A a B I C my ‎ ‎5 --- What’s this ? --- __________ a photo ? ‎ ‎ A It’s B it’s C Its ‎6 --- ________ is your father ? --- He is fine .‎ A What B Who C How ‎ 二、 对下列各句的划线部分提问。‎ ‎1 She is Cousin Mary . _____________________________________ .‎ ‎2 It’s a photo my family . _____________________________________ .‎ ‎3. He’s my twin brother._____________________________________ .‎ ‎4 This is my mother . _____________________________________ .‎ 延 伸 板 块 翻译下面的句子。‎ ‎1 －那是你姑妈吗？－________that your ________?‎ ‎－不，那是我母亲。－No, that’s my ________.‎ ‎2 －这是什么？－________this?‎ ‎－这是我的全家福。－It’s a ________ of my ________‎ ‎3 – 这是你妈妈吗？- Is this _______ _________ ? ‎ ‎ - 是的，她是。Yes , ______ _______ .‎ ‎4 - 她是你的猫吗? ______ it ________ cat ?‎ ‎– 不，它不是。 No, ______ _______ .‎ 在II栏中找出与I栏相对应的答语 I II ‎( )1 What is that ? A She is my sister, Lingling.‎ ‎( )2 What’s your name ? B I’m Helen .‎ ‎( )3 What is Lily ? C It’s a cat .‎ ‎( ) 4 Who is she ? D I’m a nurse .‎ ‎( ) 5 What are you ? E She’s a teacher .‎ 学后反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit2-3‎ 学习 内容 Unit2 My family Reading 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 掌握生词： doctor teacher policeman nurse man woman ‎2 学会用英语询问职业并作答。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 生词： doctor teacher policeman nurse man woman ‎2 询问职业的句型及回答。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 翻译句子 ‎1 这是谁？这是我叔叔。‎ ‎2 这是什么？ 这是我的全家照。‎ ‎3 她是谁？ 是玛丽。‎ ‎ 4 他是你的弟弟吗？不是的 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 根据句意和首字母提示在课本中找到正确的单词填空。‎ ‎1 --- Who is this m _________ ? --- ___________ is my father . ‎ ‎2 --- _______ is your father ? --- He _________ a doctor .‎ ‎3 --- I __________ this your mother ? --- Yes ,s ________ a teacher .‎ ‎4 --- What is your u ________ ? --- ________ a policeman .‎ ‎5 --- Who is this w _________ ? --- __________ my aunt .‎ 对画线提问：‎ ‎1．This is _a photo . _______ ________this?‎ ‎2.My name is _Lin Tao . ________ _______ _______ name?‎ ‎3.She is _my aunt.. _______ _______ she ?‎ ‎4.My father is __a teacher . __________. _________ _______father?‎ 翻译句子：‎ ‎1 你叔叔是干什么的？他是警察。‎ ‎2 她是谁？她是凯特。她是一个护士。‎ ‎3 你姑姑是医生吗？是的 ‎4. 你的表兄是什么职业？‎ ‎ ‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1.Who is this/that man/ woman? 这（那）个男的（女的）是谁？‎ who是疑问代词，用来对某人提问。Who’s是Who is的缩写形式。如：‎ ‎---Who’s he? 他是谁？ ‎ ‎--- He’s my father. 他是我爸爸。‎ ‎2 当询问某人的工作时，我们有以下几种问法。如：‎ What’s your uncle? 你叔叔是做什么的？或What’s your uncle’s job?‎ 或What does your uncle do ?‎ 检 测 板 块 英汉互译：‎ ‎1．a photo of my family____________ 2.my twin sister____________‎ ‎3.my cat___________ 4.一个好医生___________‎ ‎5.谢谢你 ______________ 6.你的奶奶_________________‎ ‎7.我妈妈的妹妹____________________ 8 .凯特的狗_________________‎ ‎9.你的一家__________________ 10.王叔叔__________________‎ 改错 ‎( )1._He__ __is___ __I_ _twin__ brother.‎ A B C D ‎( )2 ._She __ _is___ my ____uncle____ ,_Bob______. ‎ A B C D ‎( )3._Its ___a photo ___of ____my family. ‎ A B C D ‎( )4._What _are _your _father____? ‎ A B C D ‎( )5._What’s _you__ _name?‎ A B C 用适当的疑问词填空：‎ ‎1 ________ is this boy ? He is a student .‎ ‎2 ________ is your mother ? She is fine , thank you .‎ ‎3 ________ are you ? I’m fine .‎ ‎4 ________ is Sally ? She is my twin sister .‎ ‎5 ________ is her name ? Her name is Lucy .‎ ‎6 ________ is it ? It is a dog .‎ 延 伸 板 块 阅读短文，判断正（T）误（F）.（5分）‎ Hello! Please come and meet my family. This is my father, Mr Smith. He is a doctor. This is my mother,Mrs Smith, She is a policewoman. This is my sister. Her name is Joy Smith. She is student. I am a student. I am David Smith. I am a student,too. We love(热爱) our parents(父母亲) and they love us,too.‎ 1. Mr Smith is a policeman.‎ 2. Mrs Smith is a policewoman.‎ 3. David is a student and Joy is a student,too.‎ 4. David and Joy are brother and sister.(兄妹)‎ 根据中文提示写一篇小短文。（5分） ‎ ‎ 我叫李明。我爸爸是医生，我妈妈也是医生。李平是我弟弟。王老师是我的老师。他是一位好老师。 ‎ ‎ （不少于5句）‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit2-4‎ 学习 内容 Unit2 My family The alphabet 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学习字母Oo-Zz 的正确读音和写法。‎ ‎2 了解一些表示特定意义的字母组合。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 字母Oo-Zz 的正确读音和写法。‎ ‎2 26个字母中相同音归类。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 辨一辨下列字母的异同：‎ g q R P u v w v w u X Y r v O Q ‎ ‎ S Z T I J T W M N W w m z s 理解下列缩写字母的含义（注意大小写）。‎ TV, UN, PRC, USA, VIP,I Q, RMB, WC, IT, PE, , UFO, UK, , p.m. CCP, CCTV, EQ, IQ, PE, PLA, PRC, USA, , WTO, .‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 ‎ 写出下列中文词组的英文缩略词 ‎1上午_____________ 2.激光播放 器___________‎ ‎3. 联合国_________ 4.全美篮球协会___________‎ ‎5.香港____________ 6.千克_______________‎ ‎7.肯德基___________ 8.身份证_____________‎ 选出下列每组字母中含有元音音素的种类数（A.一种，B.两种，C.三种，D.四种）。‎ ‎( )1. A C F Z ‎( )2. H L I R ‎( )3. Q U W O ‎( )4. D G T V ‎( )5. K J Y I 活动二: 要点点击 英语26个字母 A) 英语中共有26个字母，其中21个为辅音字母，5个为元音字母，它们分别是：A， E， I， O， U。‎ B)．含有相同音素的字母 ‎/ai/ I Y ‎ ‎/ju:/ Q U W ‎ ‎/ei/ A H J K ‎ ‎/e/ F L M N S X Z ‎ ‎/i:/ B C D E G P T V ‎ 检 测 板 块 一、从A，B，C，D中选出含有相同音素的选项。‎ ‎( ) 1. A. ag B. bt C. df D. ir ‎( ) 2. A. bd B. dm C. gh D. jp ‎( ) 3. A. mu B. sx C. cj D. zp ‎( ) 4. A. hl B. eq C. lm D. nt ‎( ) 5. A. ta B. sw C. vh D. fs 二、写出下列缩写词的中文意思。‎ ‎1. UN ____________________ 2. KFC ____________________‎ ‎3. TV ____________________ 4. HK ____________________ ‎ ‎5. a.m. _____________________6. kg ____________________‎ ‎7. p.m. _____________________8. IQ ____________________‎ ‎9. US ____________________ 10. RMB ____________________‎ 三、按要求改写下列句子。‎ ‎1. name, is, what, your (连词成句)‎ ‎ ‎ ‎2. you, father, are, Lily’s (连词成句)‎ ‎_____________________________________________________________‎ ‎3. My cousin is a policeman. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎_________ _________your cousin?‎ ‎4. The boy is Peter’s cousin. (对划线部分提问) _______ _______ the boy?‎ ‎5. What is your mother? (改为同义句) What is your _____ ______? .‎ ‎6.This is my father . ( 改成一般疑问句) _____this ______father ? ‎ ‎7.That’s a desk . (对画线部分提问) ______ ______ that ? ‎ ‎8.I’m Lily. (同义句转换) My ______ _______ Lily.‎ 延 伸 板 块 翻译下列各句：‎ ‎1.---你爸爸是干什么的？--- 一名医生。‎ ‎ _________your father ? ______a doctor.‎ ‎2.---那位妇女是谁？ ---她是我的姑妈。‎ ‎ ________that______? _____my_____. ‎ ‎3. 这是一张我的全家福。‎ This is ______ ______ ______ my family.‎ ‎4.他们是你的叔叔们，对吗？‎ They are __________ uncles, __________?‎ ‎5.你的表兄是什么职业？‎ ‎__________ is _________ __________?‎ ‎6.谁是你的孪生兄弟?‎ ‎________ your_______brother?‎ ‎7. －你表哥是警察，对吗？－不，他是个老师。‎ ‎－Your ________ is a ________, ________?‎ ‎－No, he is a ________.‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit3-1‎ 学习 内容 Unit3 Good friends Welcome to the unit ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 掌握生词：we, classmate, twelve, too, polite, helpful，and ，how old ‎2 熟练掌握询问年龄的句型及其回答。‎ ‎3 掌握运用下列句型： Are we/you classmates? ‎ ‎ 4 初步学习描述人物特征的句型：He’s polite and helpful .‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 生词：we, classmate, twelve, too, polite, helpful，and ，how old ‎2 询问年龄的句型及其回答。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 选出含有所给字母音素的字母。‎ ‎( )1. Aa A. Ii B. Nn C. Ff D. Kk ‎( )2. Ee A. Dd B. Ll C. Hh D. Rr ‎( )3. Ss A. Bb B. Oo C. Xx D. Hh ‎( )4. Ii A. Rr B. Yy C. Aa D. Ll ‎( )5. Uu A. Ww B. Jj C. Vv D. Mm 根据汉语完成句子。‎ ‎1 This is my __________ ( 同学 )‎ ‎2 ______________ ( 多大 )are you ?‎ ‎3 My cousin is ____________ .( 有礼貌的 )‎ ‎4 ________ ( 我们 )are friends .‎ ‎5 I’m ____________ . ( 12 )‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 补全下列对话：‎ Sally：Hello, Julie !‎ Julie：_________ , Sally . _________ is this ?‎ Sally: Oh , she ______ my new friend , Millie . We ________ classmates .‎ Millie：Hi , Julie ! ________ _________ you ?‎ Julie：_________ fine , _________ you . And _________ ? ‎ Millie：I’m ___________ , too . ________ ________ are you ?‎ Julie：__________ twelve .‎ Millie：I’m __________ , too .‎ Sally：Let’s play together , OK ？‎ Julie：OK ！‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1 --- Are we classmates ? 我们是同学吗？--- Yes , we are .是的，我们是。‎ 像这种询问“是、否”的句子，在英语中叫做一般疑问句。在一般疑问句中有is，am，are 之类词时，将它们提到句子开头，结尾再加上问号就行了。读的时候句尾的重读单词读成升调。回答一般疑问句时，通常要用Yes 或No开头。句中classmates为classmate的复数形式。在英语中可以计数的名词叫做可数名词，表示一个以上的人或物时，名词就要变为复数形式。再如：--- Are you friends ? --- Yes, we are .‎ ‎2 How old are you ? 你多大了 ？ I’m twelve . 我12岁 。‎ 这是询问年龄的句型及回答。请注意英语中问句的语序与汉语不同。本句恰好与汉语的顺序相颠倒。Twelve 表年龄，也可说成twelve years old .‎ ‎3 He is polite and helpful .他有礼貌，又乐于助人。句中和都是形容词， 表示“他”的特征。在使用时不要忘了在前面加上be动词。又如：You are very helpful. Thank you . 你很乐于助人。谢谢你。‎ 检 测 板 块 按要求改写句子：‎ ‎1.She is twelve.(对划线部分提问) ______ ______ is she ? ‎ ‎2.He is a policeman. (对划线部分提问) ________ is he? ‎ ‎3.Millie is fine. (对划线部分提问) ______ is Millie?‎ ‎ 4.He is my cousin Andy. (对划线部分提问) ______ ______ he?‎ ‎5.We’re classmates.(改成一般疑问句并作肯定回答)‎ ‎　 ______ ______ ______ ? ______ ,_______ ________.‎ 用be动词的适当形式(is, am , are )填空 ‎1.--- How old _____ you ? --- I ____ twelve.‎ ‎2. Andy _____ tall and fat(胖). ‎ ‎3. We ______ good friends.‎ ‎4. --- ____ I happy ? --- Yes, you _____ .‎ ‎5 --- ______ they happy? --- No, they ______ not.‎ ‎6. Their dog _____ big and strong. It _____ from America.‎ ‎7. Pat is a boy. He _____ twelve.‎ 延 伸 板 块 了解本组同学并完成下表。在表格内填入姓名、年龄，在和栏内打“√”或“ㄨ”‎ Name How old Polite Helpful Name How old Polite Helpful 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit3-2‎ 学习 内容 Unit3 Good friends Listening and Speaking 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 熟练掌握描述或介绍人物情况和特征的句型及词汇。big strong small thin tall slim short pretty ‎ ‎2 熟练掌握含be动词的一般疑问句及其回答。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 识记和理解下列词汇：big strong small thin tall slim short pretty ‎ ‎2 掌握运用下列句型： Am I happy?‎ ‎3 含be动词的一般疑问句及其回答。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 根据首字母提示完成下列各句。‎ ‎1 Is the boy s ________ ? Yes , he’s not tall .‎ ‎2 The policeman is tall and s ____________ .‎ ‎3 My mother is tall and s __________ . She is very p ________ ,too .‎ ‎4 My uncle is big , but my aunt is s _________ .‎ ‎5 Look ! That’s my cousin Andy . He’s p ________ and h________ . ‎ ‎6 We’re not s ____________ . We’re very h _______ .‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 ‎（一）将下列句子改成一般疑问句并作回答 ‎1. His father and uncle are big and strong.‎ ‎ --- _____ his father and uncle big and strong ? No,_____ _____ .‎ ‎2. Kate’s brother is twelve.‎ ‎　 --- ____ Kate’s brother twelve? --- Yes, _____ _____ .‎ ‎3. My dog is very sad.‎ ‎ _____ _____ dog very sad? No, _____ ______ .‎ ‎4 .Alice and Amy are tall and slim.‎ ‎ --- _____ Alice and Amy tall and slim? --- Yes, _____ _____ .‎ ‎5 .Miss Han is happy. --- ____ Miss Han happy? --- No, ____ _____ .‎ ‎（二）根据所给汉语，完成句子 ‎ ‎1 .我很难过，但她很高兴。 I ___ very ____ but she ____very _____ ‎ ‎2 .她长得漂亮吗？ _____ she ________ ?‎ ‎3 .他们多大了？十三岁。 ______ ______　________ they? They ______ twelve.‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎--- Am I happy ? 我快乐吗？--- Yes , you are .是的，你快乐。‎ 像这种询问“是、否”的句子，在英语中叫做一般疑问句。在一般疑问句中有is，am，are之类词时，将它们提到句子开头，结尾再加上问号就行了。读的时候句尾的重读单词读成升调。回答一般疑问句时，通常要用Yes 或No开头。再如：--- Are they happy ? --- No, they aren’t . be 动词处于句子末尾事物不可缩写 。除am外，还可和后面的not缩写。is not = isn’t are not = aren’t ‎ 检 测 板 块 ‎（一）按要求完成下列句型转换。‎ 改为一般疑问句：‎ ‎1 Nick and Peter are happy . _________________________________ ?‎ ‎2 Lily is tall and slim. _________________________________ ?‎ ‎3 We are twin sisters . _________________________________ ?‎ 根据问句完成答 语：‎ ‎4 --- Are you classmates ? --- ___________ , we are .‎ ‎5 --- Is she your cousin ? --- No , _________ ________ . ‎ 根据答语完成问句：‎ ‎6 --- _________________ sad ? --- No , they aren’t . ‎ ‎7 --- __________________ your father ? --- Yes , he is .‎ ‎8 --- __________________ happy ? --- No , I’m not .‎ ‎9 --- __________________ a helpful student ? Yes , she is .‎ ‎（二）根据句意及所给的提示完成单词。‎ ‎1 Jack is very weak (弱)， but his brother is very s _________ .‎ ‎2 Sammi is from England . She’s E ___________ .‎ ‎3 David is not tall , he is very s _________ . ‎ ‎4 Mrs Green is very short but s __________ .‎ ‎5 How __________ is San ? He is twelve . ‎ ‎6 Dan is a boy and Sammi is a g ____________ . ‎ ‎7 It’s my birthday today . I’m very h ___________ .‎ ‎8 His kite is broken ( 坏了) . He is very s _____________ . ‎ ‎9 We’re in Class 2 . We’re c ______________ .‎ 延 伸 板 块 ‎(一)完成下列对话：‎ A：What is it ?‎ B：It’s a photo of my good friends . ‎ A：Let me _______ a look . Oh , ________ are they ? ‎ B：They ________ Sally, Lucy, Alan _______ Carl . ‎ A：_________ Sally and Lucy __________ ?‎ B：Yes . they are . They are girls . ‎ A：________ Lucy tall and thin ? ‎ B：Yes ,she is . Sally is tall and thin , _________ . ‎ A：Alan and Carl________ boys . Are they tall and helpful ?‎ B：Yes ,_________ are .‎ ‎（二）分组合作 小组同学各准备一张全家照，和同伴谈谈各自家人的外貌特征。‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit3-3‎ 学习 内容 Unit3 Good friends Reading 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学会介绍他人（性别、年龄、外貌、国籍）。‎ ‎2 识记和理解下列词汇： have, two new friends, English , American ‎3 掌握运用下列句型： I have a friend. She is from England .‎ ‎4 掌握人称代词的用法。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 介绍他人（性别、年龄、外貌、国籍）。‎ ‎2 完整表述句型：主格+be + 形容词 ‎3 人称代词的用法。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 试将下列短语或句子译成汉语：‎ ‎1 have two new friends _________________________‎ ‎2 from America _________________________‎ ‎3 from England _________________________‎ ‎4 He’s American . _________________________‎ ‎5 She’s English . _________________________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 ‎(一)阅读课文，填写下表。‎ Sammi girl Short and slim Pat twelve America ‎（二）根据所给首字母或中文提示完成下列句子。‎ ‎1 Sammi and Pat are my __________________.( 好朋友 )‎ ‎2 My father is a policeman . He’s _____________.（ 强壮的 ）‎ ‎3 I have ____________ ( 两个 )cousins .‎ ‎4 Is Nick h _____________ ? No, he’s not .‎ ‎5 My uncle is a teacher and my aunt is a teacher , t __________ .‎ ‎6 Pat is f _________ America . He is A _____________ .‎ ‎7 My sister is a slim g ____________ .‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1. I have two new friends .我有两个新朋友。‎ 这里的have表示“有” 的意思，表示所属关系，可以表示“某人拥有”或“某物具有”。 friends 是friend 的复数形式。如：I have two cousins .I, We, You, They和复数名词后面用have，She, He, It 和单数名词后面用has，如：A desk has four legs. They have a new house.‎ ‎2. She is from England. She is English. 她来自于英国。她是英国人。‎ ‎（1）be from 意为“来自……”或者 “是……人”。与come from 同义。如：I am from Jiangsu .= I come from Jiangsu .‎ ‎（2）England是国家的名字，而English这里是形容词，表示国籍。‎ 检 测 板 块 用所给单词的正确形式填空 ‎1. Tom and Mary are my （同学）.‎ ‎2. --- How old are you? --- I am (十二岁).‎ ‎3. That boy is my (表兄).‎ ‎4. Andy is a (有礼貌的) boy.‎ ‎5. Is that girl (乐于助人).‎ ‎6. Jack is ________ (美国)and Tom’s _________ (英国)。‎ ‎7. We _______ (有)two new _________ (朋友)。‎ ‎8. They are from _________ (英国)and we are from _______ (美国)。‎ ‎9. _______ (他)is tall and _______ (她)is short.‎ ‎10 . Look at _______. (they).‎ ‎11. Here are four ________ (photo).‎ ‎12. ______ ( I ) father and mother are both (都) _______ ( doctor ).‎ ‎13 .Let ______ ( I ) have a look at your new watch.‎ ‎14. My classmates are all ________ ( China ).‎ 15. Is this ________ ( they ) dog?‎ ‎16.My cousin Andy is very _______ ( help ).‎ ‎17.--- Are you from ________ (American )?‎ ‎--- Yes. We are __________( America ).‎ 延 伸 板 块 (一) 找出下列各句中的错误并改正。‎ ‎1 Alan and Bill are boy .‎ ‎2 She is from English .‎ ‎3 Is Peter and Nick your friends ?‎ ‎4 The girl are not happy .‎ ‎5 They is tall .‎ (二) 阅读短文，判断正（T）误（F）。‎ I’m James . I’m twelve , I’m from America . I’m small and thin . I have a good friend . His name is Edward . He’s eleven . He’s from England . He is big and strong .‎ ‎( )1 James is eleven .‎ ‎( )2 James is American . ‎ ‎( )3 Edward is an English boy . ‎ ‎( )4 James is big and thin . ‎ ‎( )5 James and Edward are friends .‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit3-4‎ 学习 内容 Unit3 Good friends Grammar 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 掌握人称代词主格及其与be动词的搭配用法 ‎2 学习一些新单词、短语：have a look , know ,let , look at , them ,me ,their 学习 重难点 ‎1 人称代词主格及其与be动词的搭配用法 ‎2 新单词、短语：have a look , know ,let , look at , them ,me ,their 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 用适当的人称代词代替下列单词和短语：‎ ‎1 Lily ___________ 2 Peter and Millie ___________3 Aunt Mary ___________‎ ‎4 Andy ___________5 you and Nick ___________ 6 Uncle Bob ___________‎ ‎7 boy ___________ 8 Sally and I ___________ 9 My father ___________‎ ‎10 Jill’s sister___________ 11 your grandmother ___________‎ ‎12 my twin brothers ___________ 13 Nick’s uncle and aunt ___________‎ ‎14 a‎ photo of my family ___________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 ‎（一）将下列汉语译成英语：‎ ‎1来自英国 _____________ 2. 露西的表哥 ____________‎ ‎3. 又小又瘦 _____________ 4. 看一看 ____________‎ ‎5. 对……有礼貌 _____________ 6. 我所有的朋友 ____________‎ ‎7. 又高又壮 _____________ 8. 看着 ____________‎ ‎9 他们的狗 _______________ 10 认识这个男孩 ____________‎ ‎（二）用适当的人称代词填空 ‎11.Mrs Wang is my English teacher. ______ is very helpful. ‎ ‎12.This is my cat.Look! ____ is happy now.‎ ‎13.Jack and Jim are twin brothers. _____ are big and strong.‎ ‎14.--- Is Mr Zhang sad? --- No,____ isn’t.‎ ‎15.--- Is your uncle a policeman? --- Yes, _____ is .‎ ‎16.--- Are you classmates? --- Yes,____ are.‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1 .人称代词的主格有：I (我),you（你） ,he（他）, she（她）, it（它）, we（我们）, you（你们）, they（他们） . 所谓主格就是做主语的形式。其中I (我)， we（我们）为第一人称；you（你），you（你们）为第二人称；he（他）, she（她）, it（它），they（他们）为第三人称。we（我们）, you（你们）, they（他们）是复数。I (我)后用am ; you（你）,we（我们）, you（你们）, they（他们）后用are;‎ he（他）, she（她）, it（它），后用is .人称排列：you, he and I ; you and I ; you and he ; he and I ; you , they and we . 表示承担责任，则说成: I , he and you .‎ ‎2. Let sb. do sth.常用于表示主动提供帮助，或提建议、请求等。Let 后跟动词原形，是省掉了不定式符号to的动词不定式。例如：Let's play a game. Let me carry it.‎ ‎3 .Do you know this boy, Peter? 你认识这个男孩吗，彼得？‎ ‎4．Look at them. 看他们。‎ look at 意为“看”，是固定动词词组，后面可接名词或代词。如果跟人称代词，就要跟其宾格形式。如：‎ Please look at the photo of my family. 请看我的全家福。‎ Look at them. （这儿them是they的宾格形式）‎ 检 测 板 块 (一) 在对话中填上合适的be动词：‎ ‎1 --- Hello ! What’s your name ? --- Hello , my name ______ Lily .‎ ‎2 --- How ______ you today ? --- I ______ fine , thank you .‎ ‎3 --- _______ they big and strong ? --- Yes, they _______ .‎ ‎4 --- Who ______ he ? --- He ________ my brother Tom .‎ ‎5 --- How old ______ you ？ --- I ________ thirteen .‎ ‎6 --- Who ______ she ? --- She ________ my classmate .‎ ‎7 --- __________ we classmates ? --- Yes , we _______ . ‎ We ______ in Class 5 .‎ ‎8 --- ________ you happy today ? --- No，I ______ not . I’m sad .‎ ‎(二) 改错 ‎( ) 1.How old are your mother?‎ ‎ A B C D ‎ ‎( ) 2.He is tall .He is American.‎ A B C D ‎ ‎( ) 3.They are good friend.‎ ‎ A B C D ‎( ) 4.The girl is Lucy. He is pretty.‎ A B C D ‎ ‎( ) 5.Is you a good student? Yes , I am .‎ A B C D 延 伸 板 块 阅读短文，判断正误。正确的写”T”, 错误的写”F”‎ Look at this photo. It is a photo of my bedroom. There is a picture and three posters on the wall. There is a desk near the window. There are eleven books and a pencil box on the desk. There is a chair behind the desk. There is a bed in the room. On the bed, there is a bag. It is my school bag. I love my bedroom.‎ ‎_____ 1. This is a photo of my family.‎ ‎_____ 2. There is a desk and a chair in the room.‎ ‎_____ 3. On the bed, there is a pen and a bag.‎ ‎_____ 4. There is a desk near the window.‎ ‎_____ 5. There are three pictures and a poster on the wall.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit3-5‎ 学习 内容 Unit Unit3 Good friends Task 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 复习巩固本单元所学的人称代词、be动词和形容词的用法。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 人称代词和be动词的搭配用法 ‎2 用形容词来描述人的特征 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 根据首字母提示完成短文 I h_______ four new classmates. T_______ are Lucy, Sally, Allan a______ Carl. Lucy is tall. S_______ is slim too. Sally is not t______. She is v______ helpful. Carl is not tall, he’s a s_______ boy. He is f______ England. All my new classmates are polite. We are g________ friends.‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 ‎（一）用am, is, are填空。‎ ‎1)That ______ a bird. Its name ______Polly.‎ ‎2)This ______ a book. It ______ an English book.‎ ‎3)What ______ his name? Li Lei.‎ ‎4)Who ______ that man? He ______ my teacher.‎ ‎5) How old ______ Han Meimei? She ______ thirteen.‎ ‎6) ______ you in Grade 1? Yes, I ______.‎ ‎（‎ 二）写出下列单词的适当形式。‎ fat(反义词)_________ short(反义词) ___________ boy(对应词) ________‎ long(反义词) _________ thin(近义词) _________ America(形容词) ______ English(名词) _______ is not(缩写形式) _______ are not(缩写形式) _______‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1. All my new friends are polite. 我所有的朋友都很礼貌。‎ all 在此用作形容词，意思是“所有的、全部的”，后面接名词复数。如：All my teachers are Chinese. 我所有的老师都是中国人。‎ all 还可以用做副词，意思是“完全、都”。如：They are all right. 他们都是对的。‎ ‎2. 两个形容词间用and 连接，表示“……又……”，如：big and strong, small and thin, tall and slim。三个以上形容词则在最后一个形容词前用and，其余的形容词之间用逗号。如：He is big, tall and strong.‎ 检 测 板 块 ‎（一）按要求句型转换，每空一词。‎ ‎1. This is my new friend. (改为一般疑问句)‎ ‎ ______ ______ ______ new friend? ‎ ‎2. We are good friends. (改为一般疑问句并作肯定回答)‎ ‎ ____ ____ good friends? ____, ____ ____. ‎ ‎3. My brother is fifteen years old. (对划现部分提问)‎ ‎ ____ ____ ____ ____ brother?‎ ‎4. I am his new English teacher. (改为一般疑问句并作否定回答)‎ ‎5. are, your, polite, new, and, all, friends, helpful (连词成句)‎ ‎6. My friend is from England.（同义句） My friend ________ ________.‎ ‎7. Jim is in Class 4, Nick is in Class 4, too. Jim and Nick ____ _____. ‎ ‎8. You’re Lily, right? ____ _____ Lily? ‎ ‎（二）单项选择，选择最佳答案。‎ ‎1. —__________? —No, I’m Alan.‎ ‎ A. Are you Carl B. Are you Alan C. What’s your name ‎ ‎2. ____________ Simon. This is ___________book.‎ ‎ A. I am, you B. I am, my C. You are, I ‎ ‎3. I think _______________ twelve. A. he’s B. his C. he ‎ ‎4. Is Lucy __________?‎ ‎ A. an English B. America C. American ‎5. These are coats . Those are coats, ______________.‎ ‎ A. to B. two C. too ‎ ‎6.—_____ our teacher? —She’s OK, now.‎ ‎ A. How are B. How is C. How old ‎ ‎7. She is not fat and not thin. She is a __________ girl.‎ ‎ A. thin B. tall C. slim ‎ ‎8. —_________ are Simon and Pat? —They are my new friends.‎ ‎ A. Who B. What C. How ‎ ‎9. I have two friends. ________ are Peter and Sandy.‎ ‎ A. He B. You C. They ‎10. —Hi, Lily and Kate, are you classmates? —Yes, ________.‎ ‎ A. we are B. we’re C. I am 延 伸 板 块 根据短文内容及首字母提示，填写所缺的单词。‎ I have three good f__1__, Their names are David, Lucy and Sammi. David is a t__2__ and s__3__ boy. He likes sports. Look! He is playing basketball there. Lucy is from E__4__. She looks very p__5__. She is tall and s__6__. She is our new c__7__. Sammi is David’s c__8__. She is twelve. All of my friends are very p__9__ and h__10__. I like them very much.‎ ‎1. f_______ 2 . t_______ 3. s_______ 4. E________ 5. p________‎ ‎6. s________ 7. c________ 8. c________ 9. p________ 10. h________‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-1‎ 学习 内容 Unit 4 My classroom Welcome to the unit ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 课堂日常用语：Stand up, sit down , close/ open the door ‎ ‎2 熟悉祈使句的基本句型。‎ 学习 重难点 祈使句的肯定基本句型。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 翻译下列句子：‎ ‎1 打开门 ____________________ 2 关上窗户____________________‎ ‎3 站起来 ____________________ 4 打开书包 ____________________ ‎ ‎5 合上书 ____________________ 6 坐下 ____________________ ‎ ‎ 根据中文或首字母提示完成句子：‎ ‎1. Close the (窗户), please.‎ ‎2. Open the d .‎ ‎3. (打开) the bag, please.‎ ‎4. Sit d , please.‎ ‎5. Please s up.‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 填入适当的单词，完成对话。‎ ‎--- __________ this？--- ________ a photo of my family .‎ ‎--- This is the door , right ?‎ ‎--- Yes ,________ _________ .‎ ‎--- ___________ this boy ? ‎ ‎--- ____________ carefully (细心地) ！ It’s me .‎ ‎--- Oh, yes, ___________ you . Who _________ the girl ? ‎ ‎--- __________ Lucy .She is __________ England .‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1 my classroom中的my 是物主代词，它翻译为“我的”，I 是它的主格，意思是“我”。类似的有your name 中的your 是物主代词，而you 是它的主格，前面的是“你的，你们的”，而后者是“你，你们”。以及后面会学习的he-his she-her we-our they-their it-its2‎ ‎2 Open the door , please . 请开门。‎ 这是一个祈使句。祈使句主要用来表示劝告、命令或请求听话人完成某一动作。祈使句有肯定和否定祈形式。祈使句的主语you通常不表示出来，而直接以动词原形开头。它的否定形式是在动词前加Don't,句末用感叹号或句号，说时一般用降调。如果要表达请求的语气，可以使用Please 。Please ‎ 可以放在句末也可放在开头。放在句末时，前面用逗号。‎ 如： Open the door, please. （肯定形式）‎ Don't open the door, please.（否定形式）‎ Sit down, please.=Please sit down. ‎ Please read Lesson1, Li Lei.=Read Lesson1, Li Lei please.‎ 如果句末有称呼语，则please 前的逗号可以省去。‎ 检 测 板 块 ‎（一）将下列句子译成英语：‎ ‎1 请开门 2 请关门 ‎ ‎3 请站起来 4 请坐下 ‎ ‎5 请看我的照片 6 让我看一看 ‎7 看他们 ‎（二）选择填空：‎ ‎（ ）1 --- Sit down please , class ! --- ______.‎ A Thank you ,Miss Gao B Sit down ,please C Yes , we are ‎ ‎( ) 2 Look ! ______ my dog Spotty . ‎ A This is B This’s C That is ‎ ‎( ) 3 Is this _____ photo ____ Kate’s family ? ‎ ‎ A a , to B a , of C an , for ‎ ‎( ) 4 _______ the door . ‎ A Please you close B Close please C Please close ‎ ‎( ) 5 ________ father a doctor ? ‎ A Is your B Are you C Is you ‎ ‎( )6 --- Open ______ , please . ---- Yes , Miss Gao .‎ A the a door B door C the door ‎ ‎( ) 7 --- Sit down please . ---- ________ . ‎ A Stand up B Thank you C Fine , thanks ‎ ‎( ) 8 He is my _______ .‎ A a friend B new friend C good friends ‎ ‎( ) 9 --- Are they sad ? ---- ______ . ‎ A Yes , they aren’t B Yes , we are C No, they aren’t ‎ ‎( ) 10 His brother and sister _______ my friends ,‎ A is B are C am ‎ ‎( )11 Nick and Mike are twin brothers . They _____ from Beijing .‎ A are both B all come C all 延 伸 板 块 按要求改写句子：‎ ‎1 Don’t look at me , please .(改为肯定祈使句)‎ ‎2 She is English .( 同义句 )‎ ‎3 My sister is fourteen years old .（ 对划线部分提问）‎ ‎4 all, are, new, my , polite, classmates (.) (连词成句)‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-2‎ 学习 内容 Unit 4 My classroom Listening and Speaking 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学会教室环境常用的单词： blackboard , desk , window , bag , book , pencil , box ‎ ‎2 认识1—10的数字,熟练运用祈使句并了解其运用语境。‎ ‎3 掌握名词的复数形式。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 1—10的基数词。 ‎ ‎2 名词的复数形式的构成。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 ‎(一)将下列词组和句子译成英语（5分）‎ ‎7. 你迟到了_____________ 8 上学去 ____________________‎ ‎（二）根据句意和首字母提示填空：‎ ‎9. Close the book, please. Don’t o________ it.‎ ‎10. There are twelve girls and seventeen b________ in my school.‎ ‎11. Look at the b________, please.‎ ‎12. This girl and I a ________ good friends.‎ ‎13. There are three p________ on the wall.‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 一、 写出并读出下列单词的复数形式： ‎ desk ____________ book ____________ door ____________ window _____________ ‎ boy _____________ girl _____________ pen _____________ ruler ____________ ‎ bag _____________ pencil ___________ ‎ 二．翻译词组： ‎ ‎1、 五个男孩 five _____________ 2、 十支钢笔 ____________ pens ‎3、 两本英语书 two __________ __________ 4、 七张课桌 seven ____________ ‎ ‎5、 上学去 go _________ __________ 6、 不要迟到 __________ be __________‎ ‎ 7、 六扇门 six __________ 8、 擦窗户 clean _________ _________ ‎ 三、遵照下列数字排列规律，在空白处填上正确的数字。‎ ‎ 1 one _______ three ‎ ‎2 one three _______ ______‎ ‎3 one four ________‎ ‎4 ________ four ________ eight ‎ ‎5 three _______ nine ‎ ‎6 one five ________‎ ‎7 ______ two ________ six ‎ ‎8 eight nine ________‎ 活动二: 要点点击 1. be late for school 的意思是“上学迟到”‎ 如：You're late for school again.. 而be late 的意思是“迟到，来晚了”.‎ ‎2. 与go 相关的一些词组如下：go to school, go to the park, go to the zoo, go to the cinema,它们都表示去某地，但是go home 中省略to,意思是“回 家”，因为home 是副词，跟here, there的用法是一样的，我们只能说come here, go there.不说come to here, go to there.‎ 检 测 板 块 选择正确的答案：‎ 1. ‎--- Sit down , please. --- ________ .‎ A. Yes, I am. B. OK C. You’re right. D. Thank you.‎ 2. Let’s ______ our classroom.‎ A. be B. clean C. to clean D. cleans 3. Don’t come _____ here late.‎ A. to B. on C. / D. for 4. Don’t look _____ .‎ A. to B. on C. at D. for 5. Lin Tao is _____ Chinese and Jim is _____ American boy.‎ A. /; a B. /; an C. an; / D. a; a 6. Don’t _____ sad. Let’s be friends.‎ A. am B. be C. is D. are 7. They are _____ oranges.‎ A. a B. an C. / D. the 8. We are his students. _____ is _____ teacher.‎ A. She; my B. He; our C. He; we D. She; our 延 伸 板 块 翻译下列各句：‎ ‎1 请把黑板擦干净。‎ Please ___________ ___________ ___________.‎ ‎2 请将门关上。‎ ‎___________ ___________ ___________, please.‎ ‎3 咱们上学去吧。‎ Let’s ___________ ___________ ___________.‎ ‎4 我们班有40位同学。‎ There are ___________ ___________ in our class.‎ ‎5 我的好朋友都是中国人。‎ All ___________ ___________ ___________ ___________ Chinese.‎ ‎6 下次上学别再迟到。‎ Don’t ___________ ___________ ___________ school again next time.‎ 7 让我瞧一瞧！‎ Let me ___________ ___________ ___________.‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-3‎ 学习 内容 Unit 4 My classroom ‎Reading 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学习用there be 句型来描述班级里有多少学生和物品。‎ ‎2 学习部分表示位置关系的介词。‎ 学习 重难点 There is / are 句型的运用。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 认真阅读课文，根据课文内容完成下列连线练习：‎ ‎11 nineteen boys ‎ 13 fifteen girls ‎ 14 eleven bags ‎ ‎ 15 sixteen pencils ‎ 16 fourteen rubbers ‎ 17 eighteen books ‎ 18 thirteen desks ‎ 19 seventeen numbers 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 将下列短语译成中文：‎ ‎1 in‎ Class 1 _____________ 2 sixteen boys _____________‎ ‎3 fourteen girls _____________ 4 eleven numbers _____________‎ ‎5 fifteen desks _____________ 6 eighteen rubbers _____________‎ ‎7 seventeen pencils _____________ 8 thirty bags _____________‎ ‎9 nineteen new books _____________ 10 the teacher’s desk _____________‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1 . I'm in Class1.我在一班。此句中的班级首字母要大写，数字在班级后，类似的词有grade, row.对数字提问我们用What class./grade/row.......in ?‎ 如对1提问：‎ I'm in Class1 → What / Which class are you in?‎ 1. There is a blackboard on the wall . 墙上有一面黑板。此句用了There be 句型 ‎①. 定义：There be句型表示某处存在某物或某人。‎ ‎②. 结构：(1) There is +单数可数名词/不可数名词+ 地点状语.‎ ‎ (2) There are +复数名词+地点状语. ‎ ‎ there是引导词，在句中不充当任何成分，翻译时也不必译出。句子的主语是某人或某物，谓语动词be要与主语（某人或某物）的数保持一致。当主语是两个或两个以上的名词时，谓语动词要与跟它最近的那个名词一致。‎ eg. ① There is a bird in the tree. 树上有一只鸟。‎ ‎② There is a teacher and many students in our classroom. ‎ ‎ 我们教室里有一位老师和许多学生。‎ ‎ ③ There are two boys and a girl under the tree. ‎ 树下有两个男孩，一个女孩。‎ 检 测 板 块 一、句型转换 ‎1. There are some rulers in my pencil box. (变一般疑问句并作否定回答)‎ ‎______ ______ ______ rulers in______ pencil box? No, _______ _______.‎ ‎2. There is a box in the room. (变复数句)‎ There _______ _______ _______ in the room.‎ ‎3. I have two pens in my bag. (改成同义句)‎ ‎_______ _______ two pens in my bag.‎ ‎4. This is my classroom. (变一般疑问句并作肯定回答)‎ ‎_______ _______ _______ classroom? Yes, _______ _______.‎ 5. There’s a rubber in the pencil-box. (复数)‎ ‎____________ ____________ ____________ in the pencil-box.‎ ‎6. There’re five bags behind the chairs. (同义句)‎ ‎____________ ____________ ____________ behind the chairs.‎ 7 Open the door, please! (否定句)‎ ‎____________ ____________ the door, please!‎ 二、完成句子 ‎1.请看黑板，不要看窗外。‎ ‎_______ _______ the_______ ,please. _______ _______ out of the_______.‎ ‎2.在教师的讲台上有一张海报。_______ _______ a _______ on the _______ _______. ‎ ‎3.课桌上有一支钢笔两支铅笔。_______ _______ _______ pen and two _______ on the desk .‎ ‎4.-在你们教室的墙上有三张画吗？-有的 ‎-_______ there three pictures on your _______wall? –Yes, there _______.‎ ‎5.狗在门的后面。The dog _______ _______ the door. ‎ 延 伸 板 块 ‎（一）根据首字母完成短文 Hi, I’m Lily. I’m in C__1__ One. There are sixteen b__2__ and fourteen girls in my class. Look! This is my classroom. There is a blackboard on the w__3__. There are eleven numbers o__4__ the blackboard. T__5__ are fifteen desks in the c__6__. On the d__7__, there are eighteen rubbers a__8__ seventeen pencils. There are thirteen bags b__9__ the chairs. On the teacher’s desk there are nineteen n__10__ books.‎ ‎（二）请向你的朋友介绍一下你的班级。要求：意思连贯、语句通顺；50词左右 提示：‎ ‎1.有十八位男生和二十一位女生； 2.墙上有一块黑板；‎ ‎3. 黑板上有十个数字； 4.教室内有二十张课桌； 5.课桌上有一些尺和铅笔。‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-4‎ 学习 内容 Unit 4 My classroom Grammar 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 掌握表示1-30的数词。‎ ‎2 熟悉名词的复数形式。‎ ‎3 了解There be句型。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 1-30的数词。‎ ‎2 名词的复数形式的构成。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 名词单复数互变 ‎1.box 2‎‎. boy 3.photo 4. American ‎ ‎5. knife 6. family 7.children 8. policemen ‎ ‎9. Chinese 10. class 单词已给出，该用什么形式呢？就看你的啦！‎ 1 Where ___________ Tom’s books? (be)‎ 2 There are two ____________ on the desk.(pencil-box)‎ 3 There is a new book on the ____________ desk.(teacher)‎ 4 I think this boy is ____________ years old.(eight)‎ 5 My sister is in ____________ Two.(class)‎ ‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 ‎（一）将下列短语译成英语：‎ ‎1 两张海报 ___________________ 2 二十个盒子___________________ ‎ ‎3 一间美术教室___________________ 4 三十张课桌___________________ ‎ ‎5 在我的教室___________________ 6 二十四个球___________________‎ ‎(二) 根据汉语完成英语：‎ ‎1 教室里有十八个学生和一个老师，他们很开心。‎ There _______ _______ _______ and a ______ in the classroom . They are very ‎__________ . ‎ ‎2 墙上有二十张画吗？不，没有。‎ ‎--- _______ ________ __________ _________ on the wall ?‎ ‎--- ________ , there __________.‎ ‎3 讲台上有一些花。‎ ‎_____________ _____________ some flowers on the ________ desk .‎ ‎4 门后面没有球。 ‎ ‎_______ _________ a ____________ __________ the door .‎ ‎5 我班有二十五个男孩和三十个女孩。‎ There ____________ __________ ___________ and ________ boys and girls .‎ ‎6 你们学校有一个美术教室吗？是的。‎ ‎--- ________ _______ _________ art room in your ________ ? ‎ ‎--- Yes ,________ _________ .‎ 活动二: 要点点击 数字1-12没有拼写规则须记忆，但13-19有拼写规则，都是以-teen结尾，20、30等整十的都是以-ty结尾，而二十几，三十几等都是在二十，三十等后加-和数字1-9。如：twenty-one, twenty-two. thirty-three, thirty-five.......‎ 检 测 板 块 ‎(一) 选择正确的答案：‎ ‎1 There’s a door _________ the wall.‎ A. in B. on C. behind D. near 2 ‎ There __________ａpen and two rubbers in it. ‎ A. am B is C. are D. /‎ 3 ‎ We are all __________.‎ A. from Chinese B. a Chinese C. Chinese D. ‎China 4 ‎ Let’s go to _________ school.‎ A. a B. an C. the D. /‎ 5 ‎ ---Are there any halls in your school?---________.‎ A. Yes, there isn’t. B. Yes, there is. C. No, there aren’t. D. No, there isn’t.‎ 6 ‎ ---_________ is your sister? ---20.‎ A. How B. How old C. How many D. Who 7 ‎ ---_________ on your desk?---There are some flowers.‎ A. What B. What’s C. How many D. What are ‎（二）你把这些散乱的单词按顺序排起来：‎ ‎1 is, a, bag, there, the, on, chair ‎ .‎ ‎2 four, on, there, the, wall, are, blackboard ‎ ?‎ ‎3. my, in, is, art, an, room, there, school ‎ .‎ ‎4. balls, boxes, and, five, are, three, there, the, desk, on ‎ ?‎ ‎5. is, a, twenty, there, and, students, teachers, in, classroom, the ‎____________________________________________________ .‎ 延 伸 板 块 缺词填空 This is my c__________. It is very c__________. There are twenty desks and forty c__________ in it. On the wall there is a b__________ and some p__________. On the teacher’s desk, there are some flowers. They are for our English teacher, Miss Gao. She is very p__________. We like her very much. Look! B__________ the door there is a big box. There are some basketballs i__________ it. After c__________ boys like playing them. We are very h__________ in it.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-5‎ 学习 内容 Unit 4 My classroom Task 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学会以There is / are ... 为载体表达“某处有某物”的概念。‎ ‎2 掌握30以内的基数词，了解名词的复数形式。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1表达“某处有某物”的There is / are ... 的运用。‎ ‎2 30以内的基数词。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 翻译：‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 一、根据中文或首字母提示完成句子：‎ ‎1. There are two (黑板) in my classroom.‎ ‎2. Close the (窗户), please.‎ ‎3. There are (24) hours in a day.‎ ‎4. (打开) the bag.‎ ‎5. Don’t be (迟到) again.‎ ‎6. Sit d , please.‎ ‎7. Clean t desk, please.‎ ‎8. There are forty-five s in my class.‎ ‎9. T are twenty boys in my classroom.‎ ‎10. There is a bag b the chair.‎ 一、 根据中文完成句子：‎ a) 在椅子上有一只猫。‎ ‎ cat on .‎ b) 在讲台上有十八本书。‎ ‎ books on teacher’s .‎ c) 请站起来。‎ ‎ , please.‎ d) 我们在画室里非常快乐。‎ We very in the room.‎ e) 墙上有十三张画和一张海报。‎ There ______ thirteen ______ and poster wall.‎ 三、根据首字母填入适当的词，使文章完整通顺：‎ ‎ Look! It’s my classroom. There i_______ a teacher and thirty s_______ in it. There i_________ a t________ desk and thirty students’ desks in it. There a________ eighteen new books on the teacher’s desk. There are nine p________ on the wall. On the students’ desks, there are eighteen r_______ and pencils. There are s________ bags b_______ the ‎ chairs. It is a n______ classroom.‎ 检 测 板 块 一、 单项选择：‎ ‎( ) 1. There are three in my classroom.‎ A. door B. boxes C. doores D. boxs ‎( ) 2. Don’t late.‎ A. am B. is C. are D. be ‎( ) 3. One, two. Go to school.‎ A. a B. an C. / D. the ‎( ) 4. --- Sit down, please. --- .‎ A. Yes, I am. B. OK C. You’re right. D. Thank you.‎ ‎( ) 5. There are twelve pictures the wall.‎ A. in B. on C. behind D. of ‎( ) 6. There is a in the pencil box.‎ A. bag B. desk C. pen D. window ‎( ) 7. Are there two books in your bag? Yes, .‎ A. there are B. there’re C. there is D. there’s ‎( ) 8. When (当……时候) the teacher come into the classroom, the monitor (班长) often says . A. Open the door. B. Sit down, please.‎ C. Stand up, please. D. Close the door.‎ ‎( ) 9. ---Is your ball the door ? --- No, it’s the chair.‎ A. in, behind B. of, on C. behind, on D. on, in ‎( ) 10. There is art room in my school.‎ A. the B. a C. / D. an 二、 连词成句： ‎ ‎1. bags, are, thirteen, the, there, chair, on ‎ .‎ ‎2. is, book, a, there, the, bag, in ‎ ?‎ ‎3. nineteen, there, on, desk, new, books, the, are, teacher’s ‎ .‎ ‎4. again, do, late, be, not ‎ .‎ 延 伸 板 块 ‎ There be句型与have的区别：‎ ‎(1) There be 句型和have都表示“有”的含义。区别如下：There be表示“某处存在某物或某人”；have表示“某人拥有某物/某人”，它表示所有、拥有关系。 eg.‎ ‎ ①He has two sons. 他有两个儿子。‎ ‎ ②There are two men in the office. 办公室里有两个男人。‎ ‎(2)当have表示“包括”、“存在”的含义时，There be 句型与其可互换。‎ eg. A week has seven days. =There are seven days in a week. 一个星期有七天。‎ There be 与have (has): there be 指“什么地方有什么东西（存在）”通常的 用法是“there is +单数名词+地点状语”，或者是“there are + 复数名词+地点状语”。如果后面有好几个名词并列，则根据第一个名词是单数或复数来决定用there is 或there are.如：There is a book and two pencils on the desk.be动词是由a book 决定，而不是a book and two pencils决定。have(has) 指“某人占有某物”，表示所属关系。即“某物属于某人（或某物）所有”；是其中的一部分，第三人称单数用has.如：A desk has four legs. （桌子有四条腿）They have a new house.（他们有一所新房子。）‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit5-1‎ 学习 内容 Unit5 Visit my school Welcome to the unit ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学习一些表示学校设施的词汇：school, classroom, computer room, football field ‎2 能够初步运用: Is this...? Is there ... ? How many... ? 等句型来询问某地有某物。‎ 学习 重难点 Is there ... ? How many... ? 等句型 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 ‎(一)用“am are is”填空：‎ ‎1. There_________ teacher’s desk and many chairs in the classroom.‎ ‎2. What _________ Tom and Nick?‎ ‎3. How _________ your aunt?‎ ‎4. I _________ in class 5.‎ ‎5. She and I _________ classmates.‎ ‎6. There _________2 balls and a dog behind the door.‎ ‎7. What _________ your brother’s friends? ‎ ‎（二）将下列句子改为一般疑问句，并作肯定和否定回答：‎ ‎1. There is a picture on the wall.‎ ‎2. There are two halls in that building.‎ ‎3. There are many girls in the classroom.‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 ‎（一）先用“ there be ”正确形式填空，然后再改为一般疑问句，并作肯定和否定回答。‎ ‎1. _____ __ ____ ___ some water in the glass.‎ ‎2. ____ _ ___ ____ any trees in the picture ?‎ ‎3.____________ __________ coffee in the cup . ‎ ‎4. _______ _______ some students on the playground. ‎ ‎5. _______ _______ an orange and two bananas in the basket . ‎ ‎6. On the tree , _______ _______ many big pears . ‎ 活动二: 要点点击 1. Is this your school, Peter?　彼特，这是你的学校吗？‎ 这是This is…句型的一般疑问句：Is this+名词单数？意思是：这是……吗？在回答这类问句时，用代词he/she/it，而不用this或that。‎ ‎2 How many+名次复数+are there+地点状语？  表示“某个地方有多少什么?”的句型用法。 ‎ 它的回答是：There is/are … +地点状语。例如：How many girls are there in the picture? 图画里有多少女孩？There are four. 有四个。‎ 又如：1. There are two hundred students in my school.(对划线部分提问并回答)‎ How many students are there in your school?   There are two hundred.‎ ‎2. There is only one garden in our school? (对划线部分提问并回答) How many gardens are there in your school?   There is only one.‎ 检 测 板 块 句型转换：‎ ‎1. There is only one girl behind the door.[提问]‎ ‎________ _________ __________ __________ there behind the door ?‎ ‎2 There are some pictures on the wall.[提问]‎ ‎_________ _________ ________ are _______ on the wall ?‎ ‎3. Are there any English books on the desks? [改为单句]‎ ‎_______ ________ ______ English book on the desk ?‎ ‎4. A girl is in Class 8. [同义句]‎ ‎________ _________ a girl in Class 8 .‎ ‎5. Are there any libraries in your school? [改为肯定陈述句]‎ ‎_______ ________ some ________ in my school .‎ ‎6. Are they American boys? Yes, they are . [改为单句]‎ ‎_______ ________ ________ American boy ? Yes, ______ _____.‎ ‎7.There aren’t 2 art rooms on the first floor. [改为单数]‎ ‎_______ ________ ________ art room on the first floor .‎ ‎8. This is my schoolbag .(改为一般疑问句并回答)‎ ‎________ ________ _________ schoolbag ? Yes, ______ _______ .‎ No, _________ __________ .‎ ‎9. There is a football fielding my school . (改为一般疑问句并回答)‎ ‎__________ _________ a football fielding your school ?‎ Yes, __________ _________ .‎ No, _________ __________ .‎ 延 伸 板 块 仿照例句进行对话练习：‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit5-2‎ 学习 内容 Unit5 Visit my school Listening and Speaking ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学习一些表示建筑的单词：building ，office ，toilet ，library ‎2 学习可数名词的单复数变化。‎ ‎3 学习含有there be 结构的各种变化。‎ ‎4 How many+名次复数+are there+地点状语 ？‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1可数名词的单复数变化 ‎2 How many+名次复数+are there+地点状语？‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 写出下列名词的复数形式：‎ ‎1 library 2 office 3 toilet 4 building 5 playground ‎ ‎6 hall 7 classroom 8 school 9 football 10 computer ‎ ‎11 chair 12 ruler 13 door 14 window 15 boy ‎16 blackboard ‎17 box 18‎ floor 19 family ‎ ‎20 garden 21 class 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 把下列句子改成一般疑问句的形式,后做肯定和否定回答。‎ ‎1. This is Peter’s school.‎ ‎_________________________________‎ ‎2. There is a computer room in my school.‎ ‎_________________________________‎ ‎3. There is a football field in the picture.‎ ‎_________________________________‎ ‎4. There are twenty classrooms in my school.‎ ‎_________________________________‎ ‎5 There is a garden in our school .‎ ‎___________________________________‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1 冠词的用法 a和an都是，用在名词的前面表示人、事物的类别，它们都可以表示“一”，两者的不同点是：a用在以辅音音素开头的单词、符号、字母及数字等的前面；an用在以元音音素开头的单词、符号、字母及数字等的前面。例如：a pear一个梨/an apple 一个苹果。‎ There is an “f” and a “u” in the word “full”. 单词“full”中有一个字母f和一个字母u。‎ ‎2 How many+名次复数+are there+地点状语？的句型用法。 它的回答是：There is/are … +地点状语。例如：‎ How many girls are there in the picture? 图画里有多少女孩？‎ There are four. 有四个。‎ 检 测 板 块 一、 用括号中所给词的适当形式填空 ‎1. My ________(friend) are polite and _______(help).‎ ‎2. Don’t ___________(are) late again.‎ ‎3. His father and mother are both _________(work).‎ ‎4. He and his sister live in different ________(room).‎ ‎5. Are there any _________(library)in your school?‎ ‎6. There _______(be) a pen and 2 books on my desk.‎ ‎7. How many_______(boy) are there in your school?‎ ‎8. They like ________ (read) books in the ______(read) room. ‎ ‎9. A swimming pool is in ___________(I) school.‎ ‎10. In this building, there is ____________(a) art room.‎ ‎11. There _________________(be not) a student in the classroom.‎ ‎12. ___________ (be) your sister a nurse?‎ 二、句型转换。‎ ‎1. There are some flowers on the teacher’s desk. (否定句)‎ There ______ ______ flowers on the teacher’s desk.‎ ‎2. The girls put on their shoes. (祈使句) ‎ Please ______ ______ ______ shoes, girls.‎ ‎4. We have six classes in Grade One. (同义句)‎ ‎______ _______ six ________ in Grade One.‎ ‎5. Is there a box on your desk?‎ ‎______________________________.（改复为数句）‎ ‎6. They are old bags. ‎ ‎_______________________________.（改为单数句）‎ ‎7. There is a big desk in the room.‎ ‎______ ______a big desk in the room.(改为否定句)‎ ‎8. Close your books.‎ ‎_______close your books. (改为否定句)‎ ‎9. Sally is in Class 3. ‎ ‎_______ ______is Sally in ? (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎10. There are 3 chairs in the classroom.‎ ‎______ _________ _______are there in the classroom ? (对划线部分提问)‎ 延 伸 板 块 仿照下列对话完成课本listening部分：‎ A：Is this a building ?‎ B：Yes , it is .‎ A：Is there a building in your school ?‎ B：Yes, there is .‎ A：How many buildings are there in your school ?‎ B：There are four .‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit5-3‎ 学习 内容 Unit5 Visit my school Reading ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 掌握含there be 结构的各种句型。‎ ‎2 学会对学习设施进行介绍，并能回答有关问题。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 there be 结构的各种句型 ‎2 课文中的短语。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 翻译短语：‎ ‎1 十间教室 2 多少 ‎ ‎3 一个办公室 4 一些图书馆 ‎ ‎5 在Tom的学校里 6 二百个学生 ‎ ‎7 一个美丽的花园 ‎8 A大楼 ‎ ‎9 在一楼上 10 一些阅览室 ‎ ‎11 在二楼 ‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 根据课文回答下列问题：‎ ① Is Sally’s school big?‎ ② What’s there on the first floor?‎ ③ What’s there on the second floor?‎ ④ How many offices are there on the first floor?‎ ⑤ How many halls are there on the first floor?‎ ⑥ How many toilets are there on the first floor?‎ 按要求改句子 1 There are some students in the reading room. (①变成一般疑问句，并作肯定和否定回答；②变成否定句） ________ _______ ________ students in the reading room ? Yes , ______ _______ . No , ________ ________ . There ________ _________ ________ in the reading room. 2 There are ten classrooms on the first floor .(提问) __________ ________ _________ _______ ______ on the first floor? 活动二: 要点点击 (1) hundred 百， 数词，在具体数字之后的hundred 不能加s，如：one hundred, two hundred, three hundred and twenty-two…但是固定短语：hundreds of 不同，如：There are hundreds of （成百上千的）students in the hall.‎ ‎(2) beautiful 美丽的，漂亮的  形容词， 如： She is beautiful (pretty).  She is a beautiful ‎ girl. (3) garden 花园  名词 如：in the garden .  We have a beautiful garden. (4) floor 楼层，地板 如：(on the ) ground floor （英）(在)第一层 （on the）first floor, （英）(在)第二层 There is a hall on the ground floor. (5) There aren’t any libraries in my school, but there are some reading rooms. 我们学校没有图书馆，但是有一些阅览室。 (6) some和any都表示“一些”之意，它们的后面跟名词的复数形式。但some一般用在肯定句中，而any则用在否定句或疑问句中。如： There are some pictures in my bedroom. 我的卧室里有一些图画。 There aren’t any books in his bag. 他的包里没有书。 Are there any birds in the tree? 树上有鸟吗？ (7) but 转折连词，and 并列连词 如：I have a pen, and you have a pen too, but he has not a pen.‎ 检 测 板 块 完成下列句子。‎ ‎1.你的学校有电脑房吗?‎ ‎________ ________ ________ ________ _________ in your school?‎ 1. 办公室里有多少老师?只有一个.‎ ‎_______ _______ ______ are there in the office? ______ ______ one.‎ 2. 操场上没有学生.‎ ‎__________ __________ __________ students on the playground.‎ 3. 这是图书馆吗? 不,是阅览室.‎ ‎_______ _______ a library? No, ________ ________ reading room.‎ 4. 有个足球场在我们的操场上吗？ 不，没有。‎ ‎________ there _______ ________ _________ on our school playground? No, there _________.‎ 5. 在A幢楼里有卫生间吗？‎ Are there _________ __________ __________ in __________ __________?‎ 延 伸 板 块 选择适当的词完成下列短文。‎ floors offices garden playground library big beautiful classrooms swimming ground ‎ My school is _____, and it is very _______. Look, this building is a _______. There are two _______. On the _______ floor, we read books in it. On the first floor, we can borrow some books. There are many ________ and ________ in the teaching building. You can see a big _______ in my school. There is a ________ pool in my school, too. There are many trees and flowers in it. It is like a _______.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用） Unit5-4‎ 学习 内容 Unit5 Visit my school Grammar ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 掌握名词复数的构成形式。‎ ‎2 进一步学习和运用there be句型。‎ 学习 重难点 名词复数的构成形式 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 ‎ 根据首字母或中文提示完成单词。‎ ‎1、There is a __________ (足球场)and a________- (操场)in our school.‎ ‎2、Is this a ________ (花园)?‎ ‎3、How many ________教室)are there in your school?‎ ‎4、There are five________ (百)students in this school.‎ ‎5、 How many halls are there in your school ?‎ ‎ There is o________ one.‎ ‎6、There is a s ________ pool in our school.‎ ‎7、This is a ________ .（阅览室）‎ ‎8、I have two ________ (课)in the afternoon.‎ ‎9、There are some ________ (办公室)in the building.‎ ‎10、There are two basketball ________ (场)in my school 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 写出下列名词的复数 ‎1 building 2 office 3 toilet ‎ ‎4 library 5 garden 6 ball ‎ ‎7 baby 8 family 9 bus ‎ ‎10 hall ‎11 box 12‎ boy ‎ 活动二: 要点点击 可数名词复数 英语中的名词分为普通名词和专有名词，普通名次又分为可数名词和不可数名词。可数名词分为单数和复数两种形式。当我们表示两个或两个以上的人或物时，就要用复数形式。名词变复数形式的部分规则如下：‎ 情况 构成方法 例词 一般情况下 加-s book—books boy—boys 以s, x, ch, sh结尾的词 加-es box—boxes class—classes 以辅音字母+y结尾的词 把y变i加-es family—families library—libraries 以f, fe结尾的词 变f(fe)为ves knife—knives 不规则的名词复数形式：man- men， woman- women，child- children， mouse-‎ ‎ mice，‎ sheep- sheep，fish- fish，people- people，有oo的词，变成ee，如：foot-feet， ‎ tooth- teeth， goose- geese”.‎ 检 测 板 块 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. There is office in my school.‎ ‎ A. a B. an C. the D. /‎ ‎( ) 2. How many are there in your classroom?‎ ‎ A. boy B. boys C. boies D. boyes ‎( ) 3. Is there art room in your school?‎ ‎ A. a B. an C. the D. /‎ ‎( ) 4. --Are there any halls in your school? ‎ ‎ A. Yes, there aren't B. No, there aren't ‎ C. Yes, there is D. No, there isn't ‎( ) 5. --Is this your school? ‎ ‎ A. Yes, it isn't B. No, it is ‎ C. Yes, it is D. No, he isn't ‎( ) 6. There are halls in the building.‎ ‎ A. some B. any C. small D. the ‎( ) 7. There aren't pictures on the wall.‎ ‎ A. some B. any C. a D. the ‎( ) 8. How many are there in the school?‎ A. class B. classes C. glass D. librarys ‎( ) 9. Tom and I on the playground.‎ ‎ A. is B. am C. are D. be ‎( ) 10. -- students are there in your school?‎ ‎ --There are thirty-eight.‎ A. What B. How old C. Who D. How many 延 伸 板 块 ‎.阅读理解。‎ Look! What a nice picture! It’s a picture of a school. What’s the name of it? Let me see. Oh, it’s Beijing‎ Sunshine ‎Secondary School. In the school, you can see beautiful trees and flowers.‎ Of course, there are some teaching buildings, too. There are many students and teachers in them. All of them are very good. You can see a hill behind the school. There are many trees on it. Oh, there is a river near the school. It’s very clear, I think the school is very beautiful. I like it very much.‎ 根据短文内容选择最佳答案 1. The picture is __________.‎ A. small B. big C. nice . red 2. It’s a picture of ‎__________‎‎ ‎School.‎ A. No 1 Middle B. No3 Middle ‎ C. Beijing Sunshine Secondary D. Beijing Middle 3. There are some ______ in the school.‎ A. flowers B. trees C. teaching buildings D. A ,B and C 4. There are many _________ on the hill.‎ A. flowers B. tree C. teachers D. apples 5. There is a river near the ________.‎ A. flowers B. school C. trees D. hill 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit6-1‎ 学习 内容 Unit‎6 In the park Welcome to the unit ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学习一些表示位置的介词和介词短语：between，beside，under， in front of ‎2 能看图描述人或物的位置。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 介词和介词短语：between，beside，under， in front of ‎2 如何正确地描述人或物的位置 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 把下列短语翻译为英语 ‎1. 看…… 2. 在他的书桌上 ‎ ‎3. 在门后 4. 在他们的椅子下 ‎ ‎5. 在地板上 6. 在我们的课桌里 ‎ ‎7.在两棵树中间_________________ 8.在床下 ________________ ‎ ‎9 在楼之间 10 在图书馆前 ‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 二、翻译下列短语：‎ ‎1 在足球场 2 在大楼旁 ‎ ‎3 在门后 4 在桌子下 ‎ ‎5 在小山之间 6 在小店旁 ‎ ‎7 在讲台上 8 在墙上 ‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1.on, in, under, behind, between等在英语中为介词，用来表达东西在哪儿。‎ ‎（1）I’m between the trees. 我在两棵树之间。between意为“在……（两者）之间”，通常与and连用。例如：I’m between Millie and Peter.我在米莉和皮特之间。‎ ‎（2）Peter is in front of the gate. 皮特在大门前。‎ ‎2. in front of意思是“在……的前面”，表示某个物体在某个范围之外的前方。如：There is a big tree in front the building. 楼前有一棵大树。‎ in the front of意思为“在……前部”，表示某物在某范围之内的前部。如：‎ There is a teacher’s desk in the front of the classroom. 教师前面有一个讲台。‎ 检 测 板 块 单项选择 ：‎ ‎( )1.There is a computer (电脑) _______a TV in my room.‎ ‎ A. and B. so C. for D. but ‎( )2.How many _______are there in your school?‎ ‎ A. boy B. girls C. student D. a student ‎( )3.There are _______students in my school.‎ ‎ A. three hundreds B. three hundred ‎ C. three hundred of D. three hundreds of ‎( )4.—Are there art rooms in the building? — _______‎ ‎ A. Yes, there’re B. No, there isn’t C. Yes, there is D. Yes, there are ‎ ‎( )5.There is _______office for me. It’s very big.‎ ‎ A. an B. a C. the D. two ‎( )6.—Are there _______foreign (外国的) friends in your school?‎ ‎ —Yes, there are _______‎ ‎ A. any, any B. some, some C. some, any D. any, some ‎( )7.—Is there a football field? — Yes, _______! It’s the football field.‎ ‎ A. Look at B. Listen C. Look D. Think ‎( )8.Look at the building. There are two _______.There are ten classrooms in it.‎ ‎ A. rooms B. floors C. schools D. classes ‎( )9.How many students _______in your school?‎ ‎ A. there is B. there are C. is there D. are there ‎( )10.Are there _______students in the classroom?‎ ‎ A. some girl B. any girl C. some girls D. any girls ‎( )11. —Who are you? — _______Jack and Tom.‎ ‎ A. I are B. we are C. They are D. He is ‎( )12.She is _______American girl.‎ ‎ A. a B. an C. the D. /‎ ‎( )13.Is there a book on the teachers desk?‎ ‎ A. Yes, there are B. No, there is C. Yes, there isn’t D. No, there isn’t ‎( )14.There are twenty-four _______in Grade One.‎ ‎ A. class B. a class C. the class D. classes 延 伸 板 块 用学过的介词between, beside, behind, under, in front of , in , on来描述你身边的物体的位置关系。‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit6-2‎ 学习 内容 Unit‎6 In the park Listening and Speaking ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学习一些表示公园常见的物品和动作的词语：bird， flower，lake，tree ‎2 会使用祈使句的否定形式。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎ 几个否定祈使句。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 按要求改写句子：‎ ‎1 You can clean the desk .( 改为祈使句 ) ‎ ‎2 Close the door, please . ( 改为否定 ) ‎ ‎3 There are some pictures on the wall .( 改为一般疑问句 )‎ ‎4 There is some water in the glass .( 改为否定 )‎ ‎5 There are twenty cats in the photo .( 对划线部分提问 )‎ ‎6 There are some books under the bed . ( 对划线部分提问 )‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 将下列句子译成英语：‎ ‎ 在湖面上 _________________ 在大门的前面 _______________ ‎ 爬山在操场上 _____________‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1 祈使句 ‎2 Where is the bird ? 小鸟在哪儿 ？It’s in the tree .在树上。‎ Where 是疑问副词，用来询问某人或某物的方位。in the tree（在树上）强调的是外部事物在树上。on the tree（在树上）则表示本身长出的东西在树上，如花，树叶，果实等 如： There is a boy in the tree . 有个男孩在树上。‎ There are some flowers on the tree . 树上有些花。‎ 检 测 板 块 一. 根据首字母或中文完成单词:‎ ‎1 There is a _________(鸟) in the tree.‎ ‎2 Don’t ___________(爬) the tree.‎ ‎3 Millie is in front of the __________(门口).‎ ‎4 ___________(喂) the animals, please.‎ ‎5 They ___________(游泳) in the river.‎ ‎6 Jim is on my left. Bob is on my right. I’m b_________ Jim and Bob.‎ ‎7 Millie is in f__________ of the house.‎ ‎8 There’s a playground in the m__________ of the park.‎ ‎9 ABC Park is not big, but it’s ___________(美丽).‎ ‎10 I sit ________(在…旁边) two girls.‎ 二、按要求句型转换，每空一词。‎ ‎1. Don’t look at the boy.（改为肯定句）‎ ‎ ________ ________ the boy.‎ ‎2. I have two books in my bag. （同义句）‎ ‎ ________ ________ two books in my bag.‎ ‎3. There is a picture on the wall.（对画线部分提问）‎ ‎ How ________ ________ ________ there on the wall? ‎ ‎4. There is a book on the desk.（对画线部分提问）‎ ‎ __________ __________ on the desk? ‎ ‎5. There are some reading rooms in the library.（改为一般疑问句并作否定回答）‎ ‎ ________ there ________ reading rooms in the library? No, there ________.‎ ‎6. There are some desks in our classroom.（ 对画线部分提问）‎ ‎ _________ _________ the desks ？ ‎ ‎7. Are there any girls in your school?（改为肯定句）‎ ‎ _________ __________ _________ girls in our school. ‎ 延 伸 板 块 ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ 仿照例子编写对话： ‎ A：Where is the coat？‎ B：Is it in the desk ? ‎ A : No, it isn’t.‎ B: Is it on the desk ? ‎ A: Yes, it is .‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit6-3‎ 学习 内容 Unit‎6 In the park Reading ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 继续学习一些表示方位的介词和介词短语：on the left（of），on the right（of）‎ ‎2 会用英语按一定的顺序介绍某个地方。‎ 学习 重难点 介词短语 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 阅读课文，回答下列问题。‎ a) Is ABC Park big ?‎ b) Where are the toilets ?‎ c) What’s on the right ?‎ d) Where are the flowers ?‎ e) Where is the big tree?‎ f) Where are the birds ?‎ g) What’s in the middle of the park ?‎ h) Where are some children ?‎ ‎ i) Where is the lake ?‎ ‎ J) What’s on the lake ?‎ ‎ k) What’s on the left of the gate of the park ?‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 根据课文回答问题：‎ ‎1 What is this?‎ ‎2 What can you see under the tree?‎ ‎3 Are there any birds in the tree?‎ ‎4 Where is the playground?‎ ‎5 What’s on the playground?‎ ‎6 Are the children happy?‎ ‎7 A‎ lake is in front of the playground, isn’t it? ‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎（1）It’s not very big but it’s beautiful. 虽然它不是很大，但是很漂亮。‎ but是转折连词，意为“但是，可是”。放在第二个句子前面。如：‎ The room is small, but it’s very clean. 这个房间虽小，但是很干净。‎ ‎（2） What’s in the tree? 树上有什么？‎ What’s + 介词词组？是一个非常重要的句型，用来询问“某地于什么”。回答这个句型通常“There be句型”，有时还可用It’s … 或They’re …回答。‎ 例如：What’s on the teacher’s desk ? ‎ There are some books and a box of chalk .‎ They are some books and a box of chalk .‎ in the tree（在树上）强调的是外部事物在树上。‎ on the tree（在树上）则表示本身长出的东西在树上，如花，树叶，果实等 ‎4 How lovely ! 多可爱啊！这是一个感叹句。感叹句一般以what 或者how开头。‎ 检 测 板 块 阅读短文，根据文章内容选择正确的答案。‎ Lily and Lucy are American girls. They look the same. They are twins. They are very young. They are twelve years old. They are in the same school. Their father is a worker. Their mother is a teacher. Their parents like them very much.‎ Lily and Lucy’s bedroom is big and nice. There are two desks in it. There are many books and a computer on one desk. There is a very beautiful picture on the wall. They like their bedroom very much.‎ ‎( )1 Lily and Lucy are _______ girls.‎ A England B Chinese C American D Japanese ‎( )2 They look __________.‎ A the same B the different C same D young ‎( )3 How old are they? They are __________.‎ A thirteen B eleven C twenty D twelve ‎( )4 Their parents like___________.‎ A she B them C her D hers ‎( )5 How many people are there in Lily’s family?‎ A four B five C six D seven ‎( )6 Where is the computer? It’s _____________.‎ A in the bedroom B on one desk ‎ C on the wall D on the other desk 延 伸 板 块 Can you say something about ABC Park?‎ ‎ ‎ small beautiful a big tree ‎ a lake ABC Park a playground two toilets some flowers some birds some children some boats 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit6-4‎ 学习 内容 Unit‎6 In the park Grammar and Task ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 掌握一些方位介词和there be 句型的运用。‎ 学习 重难点 方位介词的运用 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 短语互译：‎ ‎1.摘花___________________________ 2. 喂鸟______________________‎ ‎3.在……的右边__________________ 4. 在操场中间_______________‎ ‎5. come here ___________________ 6 在两只盒子之间_____________‎ ‎7 .树上的鸟_____________________ 8在我家附近________________‎ ‎9 have an ice cream _____________ 10 walk on the grass _________‎ ‎11 close the gate ______________ 12 on the left of the tree __________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 读句子，在空白处填入一个适当的词。‎ ‎1 There is an apple tree in _______ of the house and there is a pear tree behind the house .‎ ‎2 Come here . You can sit _________ me .‎ ‎3 Joy is on my ________ and Jim is ________ my right . I am _________ Joy and Jim .‎ ‎4 Who is _______ the middle ?‎ 补全对话。‎ Lucy: Mum, can you see my pen?‎ Mother: No, I can’t. _________ it on the desk?‎ Lucy: Let _______ see. It’s my pen.‎ Mother: _______ is your pencil-box?‎ Lucy: Oh, my pencil-box is in my bag.‎ Mother: Where is your bag?‎ Lucy: I can’t see.‎ Mother: Is it on your desk?‎ Lucy: No , it _______.‎ Mother: Look! Lucy. It’s ________ ________ .‎ Lucy: _______ ?‎ Mother: Behind the door.‎ Lucy: Oh, it’s here. ‎ Mother: Is _______ pencil in your pencil-box?‎ Lucy: Yes, it is. Thank you very much, mum.‎ 活动二: 要点点击 NO, he is not on the grass .不，他不在草地上。这里grass是不可数名词，表示“草地”，“草坪”。 如： Don’t walk on the grass. 勿践踏草坪。‎ 检 测 板 块 一、句型转换。‎ ‎1. There are some cats in the tree. (对划线部分提问)______ in the tree?‎ ‎2. The dog is behind the door. (对划线部分提问)______ ______ the dog?‎ ‎3. There are two hundred teachers in our school. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎______ ______ teachers ______ ______ in our school?‎ ‎4. Don’t open the window. (改为肯定句) ______ the window.‎ ‎5. We have thirty boys in our class. (改为同义句)______ ______ thirty boys in our class.‎ 二、 根据汉语完成句子。‎ ‎1.不要迟到了。 ______ ______ late again.‎ ‎2.她的花在椅子后面吗？ Are ______ ______ ______ the chair?‎ ‎3.禁止在这个湖里游泳。______ ______ ______ the lake.‎ ‎4.他们在哪里？在咖啡馆左边。‎ ‎ ______ ______ they? They’re ______ ______ ______ ______ the café.‎ ‎5.湖上有船吗？没有。 ______ there a boat ______ the lake? No, ______ ______.‎ ‎6.树上有多少个苹果? ______ apples are there ______ the tree?‎ ‎7.有一只猫在椅子下面。There is a cat ______ ______ ______.‎ ‎8.别在公园里摘花。______ ______ ______ in the park.‎ ‎9.地面上有一些书和照片。There are ______ books and photos ______ ______ ______.‎ ‎10.有许多学生在操场上。There are ______ students ______ ______ ______.‎ ‎11.房子附近有很多美丽的花。‎ ‎______ the house, there are ______ ______ ______ beautiful flowers.‎ 三、选择题 ‎1. What ______in your bag ? There are some rulers .‎ ‎ A are B is C be D am ‎ ‎2. ______the window ,please . ‎ A Open B Opening C Be open D Be opening ‎ ‎3. Don’t -_______ the flowers in the garden .‎ A feed B pick C close D climb ‎ ‎4. My friends are______ the playground . ‎ ‎ A in B on C at D under ‎ ‎5. -_______ the blackboard ? It’s on the wall .‎ ‎ A What’s B Where ‘s C Who’s D How is ‎ 延 伸 板 块 ‎ 改错:‎ 1. Not play on the playground.‎ 2. There’s a cat on the tree.‎ 3. The desk is in front of the classroom.‎ 4. She is in my left.‎ 5. Lucy is in Lily and me.‎ 6. Please have a ice cream.‎ 7. Is this you pen? No, it isn’t.‎ 8. There is a teachers’ desk in the classroom.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学初一英语预备课程导学案 ‎（预备课程Unit7 课时1 Welcome to the unit Listening Speaking）‎ 主编：窦祖菊 审核：艾锋 学习目标 ‎1.学习形容词性的物主代词﹢名词的用法：his brown cap , her yellow blouse ‎2.掌握句型 What’s in thee box ?‎ ‎ What colour are they ?‎ ‎ Whose bike is it ?‎ ‎【预习板块】‎ 根据句意及汉语提示，拼写单词。‎ ‎1. That ________（褐色）T-shirt is not Dad’s. It’s my uncle’s. ‎ ‎2. Please help me ________（拿走）the trousers away.‎ ‎3. It’s Lucy’s ________（女衬衫）. It’s very new. ‎ ‎4. Simon’s ________（毛衣）is yellow.‎ ‎5. How many ________（风筝）are there in the sky? ‎ ‎6. —________ bike is it? —It’s my bike. ‎ ‎7. I have a lovely dog. ________ name is Spotty.‎ ‎8. Lucy and I are in Class Five. We love ________ class very much.‎ ‎9. The twins and ________ mother go to the park very week.‎ ‎10. Look at the girl. Do you know ________ name?‎ ‎【探究板块】‎ 活动一：阅读learn to say部分并完成练习：‎ ‎1 衬衫 2 颜色 3 白色的 4 外套 5 橙色的 ‎6 这些 7 黑色的 8裤子 9鞋子 10绿色的 活动二：学习listening部分并完成练习：‎ ‎1 褐色的 2 帽子 3 红色的 4T恤衫 5 蓝色的 ‎6 牛仔裤 7 黄色的 8 女衬衫 9 粉红色的 10 毛衣 ‎11 灰色的 12 短裙 ‎ 活动三；学习speaking部分并完成练习：‎ ‎1 谁的 2 自行车 3 篮球 4 他的 5 我们的 ‎6 风筝 7 他们的 8 小汽车 ‎ 活动四：操练句型What’s this/are they/are these/are those? It’s/They are….‎ ‎ What colour is/are…? It’s/They are….‎ 活动六：学习形容词性的物主代词并填写表格。‎ 人称代词 I you he she we they 物主代词 ‎【检测板块】‎ A）用适当的代词补全对话。‎ ‎--Excuse me,is this _______ ruler?‎ ‎--No, it isn’t ______ ruler. ______ ruler is long, but this is short.‎ ‎--________ ruler is this?‎ ‎--I don’t know.You can ask that girl.‎ ‎--Hi, is this ______ ruler?‎ ‎--No. Look at the twins. It’s ______ ruler.‎ ‎--Thank you.‎ B)短语英汉互译。‎ ‎1. teddy bear _____________ 2. an orange orange _____________________‎ ‎3. under the bed ___________ 4. a white and black dress ________________‎ ‎5.her red cap _____________ 6. 她的蓝色牛仔裤_____________________‎ ‎7. 他的白衬衫_______________________ ‎ ‎8. 把你的书拿走_______________________‎ ‎9. 爸爸的黑外套_______________________ ‎ ‎10. 她的粉色短裙_______________________‎ C)按要求句型转换，每空一词。‎ ‎1. Are those their blouses?（改为单数形式）‎ ‎________ ________ ________ ________ ?‎ ‎2. Take your book, please.（改为否定句） ________ ________ take your book.‎ ‎3. The new shoes are green.（提问） ‎ ‎________ ________ ________ the new shoes?‎ ‎4. whose, under, bike, is, the, tree (连词成句)‎ ‎ ____ ____ _____ _____ _____ _____?‎ ‎5. This sweater is Ben’s. (提问) ‎ ‎ ________ _________ this sweater?‎ ‎6 . Is this your dress? (改复数形式) ‎ ‎ ________ ________ ________ ________? ‎ ‎7. He has a black shirt. (同义句) ‎ His ________ is __________. ‎ ‎8. Whose bike is this? (同义句) ‎ ‎_______ is _______ ________?‎ ‎【延伸板块】‎ A)汉译英，每空一词。‎ ‎1. —这是谁的裤子？ —这是我的裤子，请拿走它。‎ ‎ —________ _________ are these? ‎ ‎ —They’re _______. Please _____ _____ _____.‎ ‎2. —我的裙子是蓝白相间，它在哪儿？ —看，它在这儿。‎ ‎—My skirt _____ _____ ______ _____. Where is it? ‎ ‎ —Look! _______ ____ is.‎ ‎3. —这是谁的新车？ —是Bob的。‎ ‎—Whose ______ _______ ______ ________? ‎ ‎—______ _______.‎ ‎4. —她的鞋子是什么颜色的？ —棕色的。‎ ‎ — _______ ______ ______ ______shoes? ‎ ‎ — _______.‎ ‎5. 那件蓝外套太小了，这件粉红色的怎么样？‎ ‎ That _____ _____ ____ too small. What about this pink one?‎ B)口语交际。从II栏中选出与I栏相配的句子。‎ ‎ I II ‎（ ）1. What colour is your bag? A. They’re red ‎（ ）2. Who’s that woman? B. It’s his kite.‎ ‎（ ）3. Whose kite is it? C. It’s yellow.‎ ‎（ ）4. Where is your bike? D. Behind the flowers.‎ ‎（ ）5. What colour are the cars? E. My teacher.‎ ‎（ ）6. What is your father? F. He’s a doctor. ‎ ‎（ ）7. Are these your books? G. There are seven.‎ ‎（ ）8. Are those flowers yellow? H. No, they’re red.‎ ‎（ ）9. How many colours are there in the picture? J. Yes, they’re my books.‎ ‎（ ）10. How are you today? I. I’m fine, thank you.‎ 学后反思：‎ 盱眙县第三中学初一英语预备课程导学案 ‎（预备课程Unit7 课时2 Reading ,pronunciation and task）‎ 主编：窦祖菊 审核：艾锋 学习目标 ‎1.熟练运用形容词性的物主代词﹢名词的用法：‎ ‎2.掌握句型Here﹢代词﹢be .如Here it is . Here they are .‎ ‎ Here ﹢be ﹢名词 . 如Here is your coat .‎ ‎ 3.学会音标 /i:/ /i/ /e/ / æ/ /ʌ/ /ɑ:/ ‎ ‎【预习板块】‎ ‎ 根据句意及首字母提示完成句子 ‎1． In spring,trees ture g________.‎ ‎2． Look! The sky is b________ and the clouds are w________.How sunny!‎ ‎3． There are full of r_______ apples on the trees .‎ ‎4． An orange is o_________.‎ ‎5． The Y________ River is a long river in China.‎ ‎6． W________ kite is it? It’s Sam’s.‎ ‎7． --_________ you have a computer ?—Yes, I do.‎ ‎8． This isn’t our bag. _________ is on my desk.‎ ‎9． It isn’t their car. ___________ is black.‎ ‎10．Do they have a________ CDs in their lockers? ‎ ‎【探究板块】‎ 活动一：完成练习：‎ ‎1 冷的 2 谢谢 3 拿走 4 她的 5 床 ‎ ‎6 长裙 7 玩具熊 8 粘住 活动二：朗读reading部分。‎ 活动三：阅读并完成练习。‎ ‎1 她的白衬衫__________________2 你的黑裤子_____________ ‎ ‎3 他的蓝牛仔裤 ________________4 她的红外套_______________‎ ‎ 5 我们的黄毛衣 _______________ 6 他们的灰长裙_______________‎ 活动四：表演对话，鼓励他们进行适当改编。‎ 活动五：完成P35页的练习，带读课本上的句型。‎ 活动六：准备好自己或朋友的照片来复习本单元所学句型。（介词，服装以及颜色。）‎ ‎【检测板块】‎ A）根据句意用正确的物主代词填空。‎ ‎1 I am a new student in Class Five. This is ________ classmate, Jim.‎ ‎2 You are a teacher. What is _______ consin?‎ ‎3 Bob is an Amercian boy. _______ father is tall and thin.‎ ‎4 Miss Fang is an English teacher. ________ students are very good.‎ ‎5 This is not my coat. Ask Mary.I think it is ______ coat.‎ ‎6 We are students in No.10 Secondary School. ______ school is very beautiful.‎ B) 单项选择。‎ ‎( )1．—_______ on the desk? — It’s an English book.‎ ‎ A. What B .What’s C .What’re ‎( )2．— Is this your skirt ? — Yes,_________.‎ ‎ A .this is B. it’s C .it is ‎ ‎( )3. — _______are his new trousers ? — They’re green.‎ ‎ A .What B. What colour C .Whose ‎ ‎( )4. —Whose bedroom is this ? —It’s ________.‎ ‎ A. Lily B .her C .Jim’s ‎ ‎( )5．This is ________friend.‎ ‎ A .a her B .her C .she ‎ ‎( )6. What colour is your ______?‎ A . trousers B. shirt C .shoes ‎( )7. —_______is this? —It’s Mr White’s.‎ ‎ A. What B. Whose C .Where D.. How ‎( )8.His cap is ______.It’s ________ cap.‎ ‎ A. orange, orange B. an orange, an orange ‎ ‎ C.an orange, orange D .orange ,an orange ‎( )9._________ a teacher ._______name is Miss Li.‎ ‎ A. He’s ,His B .She’s, Her C .He’s, Her D .She’s , His ‎( )10. _______ is your English teacher? Ann.‎ ‎ A .Who B .How old C .How D .What ‎( )11. _________ is my teacher ,Mr. Li.‎ ‎ A .This’s B .She’s C .He D .This is ‎( )12. Is this ______ art room? Yes, it is.‎ ‎ A .a B .an C .the D. /‎ ‎( )13. Mr.Green is ___________father.‎ ‎ A .Jim and Kate B .Jim and Kate’s ‎ C .Jim and Kates’ D .Jim’s and Kate’s ‎ ‎( )14.Whose car is it? ---It’s ______ car.‎ A Jim B their C they D he ‎( )15. Her shoes ______ black. Her _______ are grey.‎ A is; coat B are; jeans C am; shirt D are; dress ‎【延伸板块】‎ A) 句型转换。‎ ‎1．My mum’s new coat is blue and white. (划线提问)‎ ‎ ______ _______is your mum’s new coat ?‎ ‎2.This is an orange kite. (改为复数句)‎ ‎___________________________________________.‎ ‎3.These are Jim’s yellow trousers . (划线提问)‎ ‎________ ________ __________are these?‎ ‎4.These are my sister’s pink skirts.（改为一般疑问句并作肯定回答）‎ ‎ _______________________________________________________‎ ‎5.The yellow kite is my twin brother’s.（划线提问）‎ ‎ ________ _________ the yellow kite?‎ B) 根据首字母或中文提示写出单词。‎ ‎1 It’s c_____ today. Put on your sweater.‎ ‎2 Yao Ming is a great b______ player.‎ ‎3 What c______ is the coat? It’s yellow.‎ ‎4 The girl in a red d______ is Lucy.‎ ‎5 How many __________(风筝) are ther in the sky?‎ ‎6 The girl in a red __________(女衬衫) is my sister.‎ ‎7 ________ (带走) your umbrellas(雨伞), Lily and Nick!‎ ‎8 There are a lot of nice _________ (watch) in the shop.‎ ‎9 --_____ dog is it? –It’s my dog.‎ 学后反思：‎ 盱眙县第三中学初一英语预备课程导学案 ‎（预备课程Unit 8 课时1 Welcome to the unit Listening Speaking）‎ 主编：窦祖菊 审核：艾锋 学习目标 ‎1.学习名词性的物主代词mine , yours , his, hers , its , theirs , ours以及表示“有”have(has) 的用法 ‎2.掌握句型 I/you/we/they have/She has may comic books.‎ ‎ Do you have a radio ? Yes, I do ./No ,I don’t.‎ ‎【预习板块】‎ 一．根据句意及汉语提示，拼写单词。‎ ‎1. Whose ________（发卡）are those?‎ ‎2. Nick ________（有）a pair of glasses.‎ ‎3. －Whose ________（照相机）is this? －It’s mine.‎ ‎4. I can see five ________（手表）on the desk .‎ ‎5. －Whose apples are these? －They are ________（他们的）.‎ 二．用所给词的适当形式填空。 ‎ ‎6. This is not ________ （I）dog. It’s ________（her）.‎ ‎7. —Is that bike ________（you）?‎ ‎ —No, it’s not ________（my）.‎ ‎8. —Is this e-dog ________（Peter）?‎ ‎ —Yes, it’s ________（he）.‎ ‎9. This is a yellow cat. _____（it）is green. _______（it）name is Mimi.‎ ‎10. I ________（have）a model ship. Alice ________（have）many toys. ‎ ‎【探究板块】‎ 活动一：完成练习并教读：‎ ‎1 随身听 2 有（第三人称单数） 3 连环漫画 ‎ ‎4 关于 5 围巾 6 收音机 7 电脑 ‎ 活动二：完成练习并教读：‎ ‎1 你的 2 我的 3 她的 4 他们的 ‎ ‎ 5 我们的 6 贴纸 7 手表 8 发夹 活动三：表演对话(learn to say)，操练句型：‎ ‎--Do you have…?-- Yes, I do./No, I don’t.‎ 活动四：学习(listen and learn)部分并翻译下列短语：‎ ‎1 一些贴纸 2 两块手表 3 一些发夹 ‎4 一台电脑 5 很多CD 6 三台收音机 活动五：分角色朗读（speaking）部分的对话。‎ 活动六：完成下列表格并带读表格中的所有物主代词。‎ 人称代词 I you he she we they 形容词性物主代词 名词性物主代词 ‎【检测板块】‎ A)用have, has, there is, there are填空 ‎1.I ________ a new book in my hand.‎ ‎2.Our school ________ a reading week.‎ ‎3.________ a camera in my family .‎ ‎4.Does she _________ any hair clips?‎ ‎5.Behind the door __________ some stickers.‎ ‎6.My cousin ______ a lot of CDs . Look ! ________ many on the shelf(架子). ‎ B)从括号中所给的两个代词中，选择合适的一个填入句中，使句子完整、正确。‎ ‎1. His exercise-book is new, but _____(my, mine) is old.‎ ‎2. This book is _____(your, yours), not _____(her, hers).‎ ‎3. _____(Our, Ours) classroom is clean, but _____(their, theirs) is much cleaner than _____(our, ours).‎ ‎4. Look at that dog. _____(It’s, Its) front legs are shorter than _____(its, it’s) back legs.‎ ‎5. I like _____(her, hers) coat and don’t like _____(his, her).‎ ‎6. Do ___ (you, your) like ____ (your; yours) new kite? ‎ ‎7. Look at ___ (he; his) English book. _____ (It’s; Its) too old. ‎ ‎8. Which do you like better (更), _______ (her; hers) coat or _______ (mine; my)? ‎ C)用所给代词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1 This is _________(I) pen. That’s ______(you).‎ ‎2 Mybike is black. What about ________ (they)?‎ ‎3 This book is not ______ (he). It’s _______(her).‎ ‎4 Where are _______ (she) clothes?‎ ‎5 Our school is very big. ______(they) is big, too.‎ ‎【延伸板块】‎ A) 单项选择，选择正确答案。‎ ‎（ ）1. ________ any men in the room? ‎ ‎ A. Is B. Have C. Are there ‎ ‎（ ）2. —Is that Mrs. Black’s coat? —No, it isn’t ________. ‎ ‎ A. she’s B. her C. hers ‎ ‎（ ）3. ________ is she? ________ mother is she? ‎ ‎ A. Who; Who B. Who; Whose C. Whose; Who ‎ ‎（ ）4. This pair of shoes ________ for my sister. ‎ ‎ A. are B. has C. is ‎ ‎（ ）5. —Whose room is this? —It’s ________.‎ ‎ A. her B. mine C. your ‎ ‎（ ）6. Alice ________ many good friends. ‎ ‎ A. is B. have C. has ‎（ ）7. All these books are ________ the girls. ‎ ‎ A. for B. at C. with ‎ ‎（ ）8. ________ tins of Coke ________ there in the fridge?‎ A. How much; are B. How much; is C. How many; are ‎ ‎（ ）9. —Are those your CDs? —No, ________ aren’t. ‎ ‎ A. them B. they C. their ‎ ‎（ ）10. —Who ________ a dog in my class? —Many students ____‎ ‎ A. have; has B. has; has C. has; have ‎ B)按要求句型转换，每空一词。‎ ‎1. Jill has some hair clips at home.（改为一般疑问句并作否定回答）‎ ‎ ________ Jill ________ ________ hair clips at home?‎ ‎2. These shoes are the twins’.（提问） ________ ________ these shoes?‎ ‎3. Is this your ball?（同义句） Is this ________ ________?‎ ‎4. Our school has many flowers. (同义句) ‎ ‎______ ______ many flowers ______ our school.‎ 学后反思：‎ 盱眙县第三中学初一英语预备课程导学案 ‎（预备课程Unit 8 课时2 Reading ,pronunciation and task）‎ 主编：窦祖菊 审核：艾锋 学习目标 ‎1.熟练运用名词性的物主代词的用法：‎ ‎2.掌握句型She also has a pair of glasses in her locker .‎ ‎ What does she have in her locker ？‎ ‎ Who has a pet in your class ?‎ ‎ 3.学会音标 / / / ɔ:/ / ʊ/ /u:/ / ɜ:/ / ə/‎ ‎【预习板块】‎ A)用there is、there are、have或has填空。‎ ‎1. ______________ lockers for students in the school.‎ ‎2. Lily ________________ a pair of glasses.‎ ‎3.Boys also ___________ many things in their lockers.‎ ‎4. ___________ a banana and two watches in the locker.‎ ‎5.In our class ___________ sixty students.‎ B)翻译词组 ‎1.一副眼镜__________________ 2.在电脑右边____________________‎ ‎3.几瓶水____________________ 4.有许多东西____________________‎ ‎5.在他们的存物柜里____________ 6.一双运动鞋____________________‎ ‎【探究板块】‎ 活动一：完成练习并教读生词：‎ ‎1 苹果 2 梨子 3 零食 4 一双，一对 ‎5 太阳镜 6 在……的旁边 7 运动鞋 活动二：完成练习并教读生词：‎ ‎1 宠物 2 金鱼 3 鸭子 4 小鸡 5 兔子 首字母填空： ‎ ‎1 There are some s______ shoes in the lockers.‎ ‎2 She has two p______ of trousers in the red box.‎ ‎3 Behind the pears,there is some b________.‎ ‎4 It’s hot. Have a b______ of water,please.‎ 活动三：朗读reading部分并展示课本中的答案。‎ 活动四：在黑板上画四个方框，分别写上Lily.Millie,Nick,Peter的名字，将文中提到的物品按人物归类。‎ 活动五：根据方框的提示复述课文。‎ 活动六：展示grammar部分的答案并分角色朗读。‎ ‎【检测板块】‎ A)单项选择。 ‎ ‎（ ）1.The black skirt is like _______.‎ ‎ A.his B .your C. hers D .her ‎（ ）2.—Here it is. —_________.‎ ‎ A .Thanks you B. OK C .Thanks D.I know.‎ ‎（ ）3._____ you ____a watch? Yes, we_______.‎ ‎ A .Are, have, are B .Do, have, are ‎ C .Do, have, do D .Does, have, does ‎（ ）4. My cousin _____ many _______.‎ ‎ A .have, model plane B. has, model plane ‎ C. have, model planes D. has, model planes ‎（ ）5.______name is Mimi. _____ a cat.‎ ‎ A. Its, It’s B. It’s, Its C .It’s, It’s D .Its, Its ‎（ ）6.—Whose computer is it? Is it _____?‎ ‎ —No, it’s not ____. _____ is here.‎ ‎ A .yours, my, Mine B .your, mine, Mine ‎ C .yours, mine, Mine D .your, my, My ‎( )7.These are ________new blue sweaters..‎ ‎ A.Jim and Tom’s B .Jim’s and Tom’s ‎ C .Jim and Tom D .Tom’s and Jim’s ‎( )8.There ______ _____ orange coat and two sweaters on the bed.‎ ‎ A. are;a B. is ;a C .is;an D. are;an ‎( )9.Look ____our Chinese teacher.____shirt is blue and shoes ____black.‎ ‎ A. at; His;is B ./; His,are C.at; His;are D./; His;is ‎( )10.This is ______new brown hat. _______is over there.‎ ‎ A.my; your B.mine;yours C.my;your D.my;yours ‎ B) 汉译英，每空一词。‎ ‎1．—Sandy的柜子里有什么？ —有一只玩具熊及几张光盘。‎ ‎ —________ in Sandy’s locker? ‎ ‎ —There ________ a teddy ________ and ________CDs.‎ ‎2．那件蓝外套太小了。这件粉红色的怎么样？‎ ‎ That blue ______ is ______ small. ________ ________ the pink one?‎ ‎3．—这是Andy和Millie的教室吗？ —不，不是他们的。‎ ‎—Is this Andy and ________classroom? ‎ ‎—No, it’s not ________. ‎ ‎ 4. 在我们班，有七个同学养猫。‎ ‎ ______ ______ ______, seven students _______ _______.‎ ‎ 5. —谁有宠物？ —许多学生都有。‎ ‎ —Who ______ a _______ ? — _______ ________ _______ .‎ ‎【延伸板块】完形填空。‎ ‎ This is a big tree. I can ‎1 a girl under it. She ‎2 a student. 3 name is Kate Green. She is 4 American girl. Kate is ‎5 a yellow dress. It 6 very nice. 7 boy near Kate is her brother, Jim. Jim is ‎8 a green, orange and blue bike. His coat is blue and his shoes 9 white. Kate and Jim are good students. They are in the 10 school.‎ ‎（ ）1. A. look B. watch C. read D. see ‎（ ）2. A. has B. is C. looks D. are ‎（ ）3. A. Her B. His C. My D. Its ‎（ ）4. A. a B. an C. the D. /‎ ‎（ ）5. A. on B. with C. in D. /‎ ‎（ ）6. A. see B. sees C. look D. looks ‎（ ）7. A. The B. A C. An D. /‎ ‎（ ）8. A. in B. at C. on D. under ‎（ ）9. A. is B. have C. has D. are ‎ ‎（ ）10. A. a B. one C. same D. different ‎ 学后反思:‎ 盱眙县第三中学初一英语预备课程导学案 ‎（预备课程Unit 9 课时1 Welcome to the unit Listening Speaking）‎ 主编：窦祖菊 审核：艾锋 学习目标 ‎1.学习情态动词can , must的用法 ‎2.掌握句型 Look at the sign ! You cannot fly kites here .‎ ‎ Excuse me , can I bring my bag here ? Yes , you can . No ,you can’t .‎ ‎ Why not ? 词组llisten to music , ride a bike , use a mobile , I see .‎ ‎ Look for things on the Ineret , take the newspaper home等 ‎【预习板块】‎ 根据汉语写单词，完成句子 ‎1. You can’t listen to _________ (音乐) in the reading room.‎ ‎ 2. Don’t _________ (吸烟) in the hospital(医院).‎ ‎3. We can _________ (放) kites in the park.‎ ‎4. There is a big _________ (超市) near our school.‎ ‎ 5. We can read _________ (报纸) in the library.‎ ‎ 6. Can I listen to the radio _________ (首先).‎ ‎ 7. Don’t _________ (大叫) in the classroom.‎ ‎ 8. The light is red, you can’t _____ (穿过) the road. You must ______ (等)for the green light.‎ ‎ 9. They can _________ (使用)computers.‎ ‎【探究板块】‎ 活动一：‎ ‎1.提建议时的肯定用语：a.我可以开门__________b.他可以站起来__________‎ ‎2.提建议时的否定用语: a.你不可以画画_________b.她不能打篮球_________‎ ‎3.询问原因的用语:a.为什么____________b. 为什么不_____________ ‎ 活动二： 朗读、带读并翻译对话 活动三：‎ 1. 骑自行车________________ 2.抽烟_______________‎ 3. 使用手机________________ 4.看电视______________ ‎ ‎5.听音乐____________________6.放风筝_______________‎ ‎*说明:请学生板书英文表达式并带领同学齐声朗读 活动四： ‎ 在飞机上能做的：___________________,不能做的：____________________.‎ 在动物园能做的：_________________, 不能做的：____________________.‎ 活动五：翻译短语:‎ 1. 做家庭作业________________ 2.大喊大叫______________‎ 3. 在互联网上查找东西____________________________________‎ ‎*说明:请学生板书英文表达式并带领同学齐声朗读 活动六：翻译短语 1. 在书上写字______________________‎ 2. 把报纸带回家______________________ 3.把我的包带来________________‎ ‎*说明:请学生板书英文表达式并带领同学齐声朗读 活动七：‎ 在图书馆可以做的_____________________不可以做的__________________‎ 如果你想做某件事该怎么询问?______________________________________‎ ‎【检测板块】‎ ‎（一）汉译英：‎ ‎1. 看电视______________ 2. 听音乐_______________ ‎ ‎3. 放风筝 ___________4. 骑自行车 ________ 5. 在网上查找东西_____________________‎ ‎6. 做家庭作业 _________________ 7.看这个标记_________________ ‎ （二） 用情态动词填空 ‎1. Can I watch TV now, mum? No, you_______. ‎ ‎2. ______ you ride a bike? No, I can't.‎ ‎3.. My mother________ make cakes but my father_______.‎ （二） 单项选择 1. ‎"_______ you speak English?" "No, I can't."‎ ‎ A. Must B. would C. May D. Need 2. ‎"Mary, ________ that storybook, please." "Sorry, I________ it to the library."‎ ‎ A. take, bring B. bring, take C. take, take D. bring, bring 3. I _______ the tree, but I _______ nothing.‎ ‎ A. look, see B. see, look C. look at, see D. see, look at (四) 句型转换 1. You can park your car here. （否定句）_____________________________________________‎ 2. ‎ You can meet my family and eat dinner with us. （改为一般疑问句）__________________________‎ 3. We can see some animals in the zoo（对斜体部分提问）___________________________________‎ 4. ‎ We have twenty colour photos.（对斜体部分提问）_________________________________________‎ ‎【延伸板块】‎ 根据汉语完成译句 ‎1.----我能看电视吗，妈妈？ ----不行，你可以等一会再看。‎ ‎----Can I ______TV, Mum?‎ ‎----No, you______. You ______ ______TV later.‎ ‎2．她没有随身听，但是她的弟弟有一个。‎ ‎ She ______ ______a Walkman, but her brother ______one.‎ ‎3．我们不能在公园里骑自行车。‎ ‎ We ______ ______ ______ ______ in the park.‎ ‎4．她可以把包带进超市吗？‎ ‎ ______she______her bag ______the______?‎ ‎5. 我们不会踢足球，但是我们会打篮球。_________________________________________‎ ‎6. 他们不会吸烟。_________________________________________‎ 学后反思：‎ 盱眙县第三中学初一英语预备课程导学案 ‎（预备课程Unit 9 课时2 Reading ,pronunciation and task）‎ 主编：窦祖菊 审核：艾锋 学习目标 ‎1.熟练掌握can , must的用法 ‎2.掌握句型Where can we put Sign1 ? Can I eat some bread , Mum?‎ ‎3.词组cross the road , wait for the green light , look left ‎ Park the bike under the tree , look for the right place ‎ ‎ Bring the bag into the supermarket , use a shopping basket ‎ Look up and down, put it over there ‎ 4.掌握音标 / eɪ / / aɪ/ / ɔɪ / / əʊ / /aʊ / /ɪə /‎ ‎ / eə / /ʊə/‎ ‎【预习板块】‎ A)用所给单词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1. ___________ in the street. (not play)‎ ‎2. Why not ___________ football on the playground?(play)‎ ‎3. Let us ___________ kites after school. (fly)‎ ‎4. You can’t ___________in the library.(shout)‎ ‎5. Please don’t ___________ on the plane.(smoke)‎ ‎6. Who ___________ a pet in your class?(have)‎ B)英汉互译。‎ ‎1.过马路________________ 2.等绿灯________________‎ ‎3.先向左看________________ 4.把包带进超市________________‎ ‎5.吧它放那边________________ 6.寻找合适的地方________________‎ ‎7.look at the sign ______________8.look for things on the Internet___________‎ ‎9.write in the books ______________ 10. Look up and down________________‎ ‎【探究板块】‎ 活动一：学习Reading 部分的单词 交通灯__________ 穿过___________ 马路______________‎ 必须____________ 等候___________ 然后______________‎ 此刻_____________ 停车_______________ 恰当_____________‎ 地方_____________ 超市_____________ 到……里_____________‎ 购物篮_______________ ‎ 活动二： 朗读、带读 Reading 部分课文并翻译、讲解书上练习答案。‎ 活动三：翻译词组 1. 过马路______________________ 2.等待绿灯_____________________‎ 3. 向左右看______________________ 4.找到合适的地方_______________‎ ‎5.停在超市前面_____________________ 6.把包带进图书馆_______________‎ ‎*说明:请同学板演并带其他同学朗读 活动四：‎ 向人询问该把书包放在哪_____________________回答:________________‎ 向人询问是否可以踢足球_____________________‎ 肯定回答:________________ 否定回答:____________________‎ 活动五：翻译短语:‎ ‎1.放下足球________________ 2.吃面包______________‎ ‎3.做家庭作业_________________ 4.玩电脑游戏_____________________‎ ‎*说明:请学生板书英文表达式并带领同学齐声朗读 活动六：综合语法中的知识点:‎ 关于"can"和"must"的肯定句型____________________‎ 关于"can"和"must"的疑问句________________________________________‎ 关于"can"和"must"的否定句________________________________________‎ 活动七：‎ 在公园可以做的_________________________________________________‎ 不可以做的_____________________________________________________‎ 小组成员准备图片请其他同学把标示牌插在应该放的地方 活动八：综合本节课的知识点，分角色表演对话。‎ ‎【检测板块】‎ 一）用情态动词填空 ‎1. Must we go back at once? No, you _____________ ‎ ‎2. Must I return the book this morning? No, you________. But you_______ return it before supper. 3. It's too late. I________ go home.‎ ‎4. I _______ find my new watch now. ‎ ‎5. ________ I finish my work in twenty minutes? No, you needn't.‎ ‎ (二) 单项选择 1. ‎---__________ I take the newspaper away? ----No, you mustn't. You ________ read it only here.‎ ‎ A. Must, can B. May, can C. Need, must. D. Must, must 2. This key _______ be Peter's. His is still in the lock.‎ ‎ A. may not B. can't C. mustn't D. needn't 3. ‎---May I have a look at your letter? ---No, you ________.‎ ‎ A. don't B. can't C couldn't D. mustn't 4. ‎--- Must we do some cleaning now? ---No, you_________. You_______ go home.‎ ‎ A. mustn't, may B. mustn't, must C. needn't, may D. can't, can 5. ‎"_______ you speak English?" "No, I can't."‎ ‎ A. Must B. would C. May D. Need ‎ ‎【延伸板块】句型转换（每空一词）‎ ‎1. Lucy can listen to music on the plane.（改为否定句）‎ ‎ Lucy ___________ ___________ to music on the plane.‎ ‎2. They can eat snacks here.（改为一般疑问句，并作否定回答）‎ ‎ ___________ they ___________ snacks here? ___________, they ___________.‎ ‎3. Please open the door.（改为否定句）‎ ‎ Please ___________ ___________ the door.‎ ‎4. You can’t shout in the library.(改为祈使句)‎ ‎ ___________ ___________ in the library, please.‎ ‎5. I can see some signs in the park.（对划线部分提问）‎ ‎___________ ___________ you ___________ in the park?‎ ‎6. Can I use your pencil? (作肯定回答)‎ ‎ Yes, _________ _________.‎ ‎7. I see some apples on the tree.（改为一般疑问句）‎ ‎ _________ you see _________ apples on the tree?‎ ‎8. She must look for a right place to park her bike.(同义句)‎ ‎ She must look for a right place _________ _________ _________.‎ 学后反思:‎ 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit1-1‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 1 This is me Welcome to the unit 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学会介绍自己。‎ ‎2 学会使用适当的问候语。‎ 学习 重难点 问候语及如何询问姓名和自我介绍。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 词组翻译：‎ ‎1. 一只电子狗______________ 2. 我的主人__________________‎ ‎3. 看书_____________________ 4. 早上好__________________‎ ‎5. 如何照顾Kitty_______________ 6. 晚上好_________________‎ ‎7. 遇到新朋友____________ 8. 晚安_____________________________‎ ‎9. 在北京阳光中学的第一天_________________ ‎ ‎10. 他们第一堂英语课_______________‎ ‎11．交朋友__________________ 12. 相互自我介绍_____________________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 完成对话：‎ ‎(A)‎ L: Hello.‎ M: Hi!‎ L: My name __________ Liu Mei. __________ your name?‎ M: __________ Mike.‎ L: Nice to meet you!‎ M: __________ __________ __________ __________, too.‎ L: __________ be friends.‎ ‎(B)‎ Joan: Good morning!‎ Ann: __________ __________!‎ Joan: __________ __________ __________?‎ Ann: My name is Ann.‎ Joan: Nice to meet you.‎ Ann: __________ __________ __________ __________, __________.‎ Joan: Welcome to our school.‎ Ann: __________ __________.‎ 根据句意及所给的提示完成单词：‎ ‎1 Hello ! What is y _________ name ?‎ ‎2 This is my instruction ___________ (书).‎ ‎3 Let’s be good __________ (朋友).‎ ‎4 My _________ Hobo, What’s yours ?‎ ‎5 I have a pet cat , so I’m its m__________.‎ ‎6 Sunday is the f __________ day of a week .‎ ‎7 Do you know the __________ (时间).‎ ‎8 Hello！Nice to m __________ you .‎ ‎9 I love this ____________ (电子狗).‎ ‎10 Who is it ? Oh , this is _______________ .(我)‎ 检 测 板 块 选择填空：‎ ‎( )1. This is a very interesting book with lots of new words. Please ______ it carefully.‎ A. look B. see C. look at D. read ‎( )2. I really love sports. Can you tell me how ___ like a good swimmer?‎ ‎ A. swims B. to swimming C. to swim D. swimming ‎( )3. The teacher asks the students to write an article______ the Mid-Autumn Day.‎ ‎ A. in B. of C. about D. at ‎( )4. Please introduce yourselves ______ each other.‎ ‎ A. to B. with C. and D. about ‎( )5. Excuse ______, are ______my new classmate?‎ ‎ A. me, you B. my, your C. I, you D. me, your ‎( )6. Let’s ______ each other.‎ ‎ A. make friends B. make friends to C. make friend with D. make friends with ‎( )7. — ___________? — My name is Mark.‎ A. Are you Mark? B. What’s this in English C. Hello, Mark. D. What’s your name?‎ ‎( )8. What ______ your sister’s name?‎ ‎ A. are B. does C. is D. were ‎( )9. — It’s time to go to bed, Lily! — Ok. ______, Mummy.‎ ‎ A. Good morning. B. Good afternoon. C. Good evening D. Good night ‎( )10. Here is a bag. Could you carry________ for the old man?‎ ‎ A. it B. its C. it’s D. them 延 伸 板 块 Choose the best answers: ( )1. Excuse ________,are ________ my master? A. me; you B. my; your C. I; you ‎( )2. – What’s your name, please? A. This is Melinda B. That is Melinda C. I am Melinda ‎（ ）3. These are your new books. Please ________ them well. A. look at B. look after C. look like ( )4. -- It's time to go to bed, Betty! -- OK. ________, Mummy. A. Good morning B. Good night C. Good evening ( )5. Let's ________ each other. A. make friends B. make friends to C. make friends with 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit1-2‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 1 This is me Reading 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1. 了解如何用英语做自我介绍或介绍别人。‎ ‎2. 学会使用人称代词。‎ 学习 重难点 课文中的短语。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 短语互译：‎ 十二岁_________________ 在七年级(一)班_________________‎ 喜欢做某事_________________ 喜欢踢足球/听音乐/跳舞_________________‎ 在读书/篮球/英语俱乐部_________________ 出生于1990年_________________‎ 出生于1990年7月7日_________________ 放学后_________________‎ 来自_________________ 又高又苗条_________________‎ 有黑色的长/短发_________________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 Do T or F questions. ‎ ‎1.Kitty is a 12-year-old boy. ‎ ‎2.Simon lives in Shanghai now. ‎ ‎3.Sandy has black hair. ‎ ‎4.Amy loves swimming. ‎ ‎5.Daniel doesn’t wear glasses. ‎ ‎6.Sandy is short and polite. ‎ ‎7.Kitty loves swimming, but she doesn’t like dancing. ‎ ‎8.Daniel is polite and helpful. ‎ 根据句意和汉语注释，在空格内写出各单词的正确形式：‎ ‎1. His father is a kind man. He is very __________（乐于助人）‎ ‎2.You can find Millie in the__________（阅读）room.‎ ‎3. Do you want __________（居住）in Shanghai?‎ ‎4. She __________（有） black hair and big eyes.‎ ‎5. Mary enjoys __________（游泳）in summer.‎ ‎6. Simon __________(出生在) Shanghai but he lives in Beijing now.‎ ‎7. Are you good at __________（跳舞）?‎ ‎8. Sandy___________(来自) Beijing. She has_____________(又长又黑的头发).‎ ‎9. The man with __________（眼镜）is my English teacher.‎ ‎10. We are __________（主人）of our country.‎ ‎11. Millie is 12 _________(岁数). She is __________(擅长) English. ‎ ‎12. Millie loves reading. She is in ________________(读书俱乐部). ‎ 检 测 板 块 选择填空：‎ ‎( )1. Where ______ my glasses? I can’t find______.‎ A. is, it B. does, it C. are, them D. do, them ‎( )2. My cousin is ______.‎ ‎ A. in Class five, Grade Six B. in class five, grade six ‎ C. in the Class Five, Grade Six D. in Class Five, Grade Six ‎( )3. Daniel ______ the fourth floor.‎ ‎ A. live on B. live in C. lives in D. lives on ‎( )4. He ______ born in 1994, so he ______ 12 years old this year.‎ ‎ A. be, is B. was, was C. was, is D. is, is ‎( )5. —______ you born in Suzhou? —No, ______.‎ ‎ A. Was, I wasn’t B. Was, I wasn’t C. Were, you weren’t D. Were, I wasn’t ‎( )6. —______ everyone here today? —Yes, we______. ‎ ‎ A. Is, is all here B. Are, are all here C. Is, all are here D. Is, are all here ‎( )7. He loves ______ music at night.‎ ‎ A. to listen B. listening C. listens to D. listening to ‎( )8. Where ______ his new classmates ______ from?‎ ‎ A. is, come B. are, come C. does, come D. are, /‎ ‎( )9. My aunt’s hair ______ black and beautiful.‎ ‎ A. are B. is C. was D. were ‎( )10. ______ your best friend good at ______ ?‎ ‎ A. Do, dance B. Does, dancing C. Are, dancing D. Is, dancing ‎( )11. ---Doctor, do I take this before or after the meal? ---Read the _______.‎ ‎ A. book B. newspaper C. instruction D. paper ‎( )12. ---How old is Hobo? ---He is one _____ old.‎ ‎ A. year B. years C. months D. days 近义句转换：‎ ‎ 1) Simon comes from Shanghai. Simon _________ Shanghai ‎ ‎2) Millie’s cousin is clever at Maths Millie’s cousin __________ Maths. ‎ ‎3) Daniel enjoys playing computer games. Daniel _____ ______ computer games. ‎ ‎4) Amy loves swimming. Amy _____ swimming. ‎ 延 伸 板 块 翻译下列句子：‎ ‎1. 我有一个堂弟。他有礼貌并且乐于助人。‎ ‎2. 那个女孩喜欢读书,她是阅读俱乐部的一个成员。‎ ‎3. —你是杭州人吗？ —不，我是苏州人。‎ ‎4. 她在七（4）班 , 她学习很刻苦。‎ ‎5. Sandy长着短而黑的头发，戴着眼镜。‎ ‎6. Kitty 不喜欢打排球。‎ ‎7.Millie喜欢照看Eddie.‎ ‎8.他的同桌是从哪里来的?她从上海来.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit1-3‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 1 This is me Reading 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1. 掌握如何用英语自我介绍或介绍别人。‎ ‎2. 学会使用人称代词。‎ ‎3. 掌握重要语言点，词组，句型。‎ 学习 重难点 重要语言点，词组，句型。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 短语互译：‎ 努力学习(英语/数学/语文) _______________擅长（做）某事_______________‎ 擅长游泳_______________一个风趣的女孩_______________‎ 玩得开心_______________戴眼镜一副眼镜_______________‎ 喜欢玩电脑游戏_______________有礼貌而且乐于助人_______________ ‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 回答课文有关问题。‎ ‎ 1.Does Millie have a dog? ‎ ‎2.What’s the name of the dog? .‎ ‎3.Does Simon like football? ‎ ‎4.Where do Simon’s parents come from? ‎ ‎5.Is Sandy tall and slim? ‎ ‎6.What does Sandy like to do? ‎ ‎7.Is Kitty 11 years old? ‎ ‎8. Does Amy like swimming? ‎ ‎9. Is Amy tall or short? ‎ ‎10.Who wears glasses, Simon or Daniel? ‎ 根据句意填空：‎ ‎1.       It’s the _______ day at school. So I don’t know much about it.(one)‎ ‎2.       Her name is Millie. She loves ________(read).‎ ‎3.       Amy is clever at ________(swim).‎ ‎4.       The boy is polite and ________ (help).‎ ‎5.       Our English teacher often wears ________(glass)‎ ‎6.       Amy is ________.(fun) We all like her very much.‎ 检 测 板 块 选择填空：‎ ‎( )1. My sister is good ______ volleyball.‎ A. in playing B. play C. at play D. at playing ‎ ‎( )2. Daniel likes playing ______, and Simon likes playing ______.‎ A. football, piano B. the football, piano ‎ C. the football, the piano D. football, the piano ‎( )3. The man ______ glasses is our History teacher.‎ A. in B. on C. with D. wears ‎( )4. He can’t mend his bike. Let’s ______.‎ A. help him B. helping him C. help me D. to help he ‎( )5. —Your English is very good. —________.‎ ‎ A. You’re welcome. B. Oh, no. C. You’re right. D. Thank you.‎ ‎( )6. There are two ______ of ______ on the desk.‎ ‎ A. pairs, glass B. pair, glasses C. pairs, glasses D. pair, glass ‎( )7. Kitty enjoys ______ very much.‎ ‎ A. skates B. to skate C. to skating D. skating ‎( )8. ______ your father _____ reading newspapers?‎ ‎ A. Is, enjoy B. Do, enjoy C. Are, enjoy D. Does, enjoy ‎( )9. ______ are in Class 1, Grade 6. ______ in the same class.‎ ‎ A. Jimmy, I and Tom; Their B. I, Jimmy and Tom; They’re ‎ C. Jimmy, Tom and I; They’re D. Jimmy, Tom and I; We’re ‎( )10. Our English teacher seldom ______ the orange coat.‎ ‎ A. putting on B. puts on C. wears D. wear ‎( )11. ---Chinese players are better at _____ than tennis.---That’s true.‎ ‎ A. swim B. badminton C. boat D. tennis ‎( )12. David is too young to play football, but he likes to ____ a ball.‎ ‎ A. play B. play the C. play with D. play for ‎( )13. Sue is from America, but she ______ in Beijing now.‎ ‎ A. was born B. lives C. will come D. visits ‎( )14. ---_______ ---I’m from London‎, ‎England.‎ ‎ A. Where are you? B. Where do you live?‎ ‎ C. Where do you come from? D. Where is England?‎ 延 伸 板 块 ‎1.       My parents_______ (come) from Shandong.‎ ‎2.       Sam _______ (not like) playing computer games.‎ ‎3.       The beautiful girl _______ (wear) glasses.‎ ‎4.       The Zhang family _______ (live) in a flat in Nanjing.‎ ‎5.       My father loves _______ (read) newspapers after work.‎ ‎6.       What _______her classmates _______ (call) her teacher?‎ ‎7.       _______ you _______ (love) each other in your family?‎ ‎8.       _______ (be) your cousin very clever at maths?‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit1-4‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 1 This is me Vocabulary ﹠Grammar simple present tense of the verb ‘to be’‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1. 学会使用动名词和名词来谈论各种运动。‎ ‎2. 学会描述不同种类的运动及其运动场地。‎ ‎3. 理解动词to be的一般现在时的各种形式，掌握肯定句、否定句、疑问句及其肯定和否定回答的基本用法。‎ ‎4. 能使用一般现在时的形式来谈论有关人或物的信息。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 各种运动名称 ‎2 to be的一般现在时的各种形式：I’m (not) …； You/We/They are (not) …‎ ‎ He/She/It is (not)… ；Are you/we/they …? Yes, I am./we are./they are. ‎ No, I’m not./we are not./they are not.‎ ‎ Is he/she/it …? Yes, he/she/it is. No, he/she/it isn’t.‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 在排球场打排球______________________ ‎ 在羽毛球场打羽毛球______________________‎ 在网球场打网球______________________‎ 在足球场踢足球______________________‎ 在操场打篮球______________________‎ 去游泳/跑步/溜冰/滑雪______________________‎ 该上体育课了______________ ‎ 进行体育运动__________________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 ‎1 回答问题：‎ ‎1）Which sport do you like?‎ ‎2）Who is your favourite sport star?‎ ‎3）Where do you play sport?‎ ‎4）What do you need/wear when you play sport? ‎ ‎5）Who do you play sport with, your families or your friends? ‎ ‎2 To be 用法：‎ The verb ‘to be’ has three forms in the simple present tense——‘am’, ‘is’ and ‘are’. ‎ ‎ When do we use ‘am’? When do we use ‘is’? When do we use ‘are’? Think them over and look at the table on page 12.‎ ‎ 1) We use ‘am’ when the subject is _____ (I). We use ‘are’ when the subject is ____ (we), ____ (you) or _____ (they). We use ‘is’ when the subject is ____ (he), ____ (she) or _____ (it).‎ ‎ 2) Negative forms of the verb ‘to be’ in the simple present tense are:‎ ‎ I ______/ _______ … (am not/ I’m not)‎ ‎ We/You/They _____ / _____ … (are not/ aren’t )‎ ‎ He/ She/ It _____/ ____ … (is not/ isn’t)‎ 活动二: 要点点击 一般现在时 ‎ ‎1.含义：一般现在时表示经常发生的习惯性的动作或目前所处的状态。 2.时间状语： always, often,  usually,  sometimes等；every   day (week,‎ ‎ year...),  on Sundays...‎ ‎3.结构：主语＋动词 ‎ 动词 be 遇有主语是第一人称单数时，be 改为 am 遇有主语是第二人称时，be 改为 are, 遇有主语是第三人称单数时，be 改为 is. 　　例如:I'm a student and he is a student, too. 　　我是一个学生 ，他也是一个学生。 　　We are all students. 　　我们都是学生。 be动词一般现在时的句型变化--否定句、一般疑问句、特殊疑问句：‎ ‎　否定句：主语+ be + not +其它。如：He is not a worker.他不是工人。‎ ‎　一般疑问句：Be +主语+其它。如：-Are you a student? 　-Yes. I am. / No, I'm not.‎ ‎　特殊疑问句：疑问词+一般疑问句。如：Where is my bike?‎ 检 测 板 块 用am, is, are 填空 ‎1. I ______ a boy. ______ you a boy? No, I _____ not. ‎ ‎2. The girl______ Jack's sister. ‎ ‎3. The dog _______ tall and fat. ‎ ‎4. The man with big eyes _______ a teacher. ‎ ‎5. ______ your brother in the classroom? ‎ ‎6. Where _____ your mother? She ______ at home. ‎ ‎7. How _______ your father? ‎ ‎8. Mike and Liu Tao ______ at school. ‎ ‎9. Whose dress ______ this? ‎ ‎10. Whose socks ______ they? ‎ ‎11. That ______ my red skirt. ‎ ‎12. Who ______ I ? ‎ ‎13.The jeans ______ on the desk. ‎ ‎14.Here ______ a scarf for you. ‎ ‎15. Here ______ some sweaters for you. ‎ ‎16. The two cups of milk _____ for me. ‎ ‎17. Some tea ______ in the glass. ‎ ‎18. Gao shan's shirt _______ over there.‎ 延 伸 板 块 ‎19. My sister's name ______ Nancy. ‎ ‎20. This ______ not Wang Fang's pencil. ‎ ‎21. ______ David and Helen from England? ‎ ‎22. There ______ a girl in the room. ‎ ‎23. There ______ some apples on the tree. ‎ ‎24. _______ there any kites in the classroom? ‎ ‎25. _______ there any apple juice in the bottle? ‎ ‎26. There _______ some bread on the plate. ‎ ‎27. There _______ a boy, two girls, three men and ten women in the park. ‎ ‎28. You, he and I ______ from China.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit1-5‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 1 This is me Grammar simple present tense of the verb ‘to do’‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1. 理解并掌握行为动词否定句、疑问句及其肯定和否定回答的基本用法。‎ ‎2. 能熟练掌握使用一般现在时的各种形式来谈论有关人或物的信息。‎ ‎3. 能结合本单元话题，用一般现在时的知识进行交际。‎ 学习 重难点 词组：at the weekend o swimming go running Watch games have dinner have breakfast 句型：I/You/We/They don’t like …‎ ‎ Do I/you/we/they like …? Yes, I/you we/they do. No, I/you we/they don’t.‎ ‎ Does he/she/it like …? Yes, he/she/it does. No, he/she/it doesn’t.‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 翻译：‎ 吃早饭/午饭/晚饭________________带某人散步________________‎ 带某人去某地________________看一看……________________‎ 把某物带到那里/把某物带回家________________拍照________________‎ 把某物带在某人身边________________步行回家________________‎ 乘公交去……________________半小时________________‎ 放风筝________________在我爷爷奶奶家________________‎ 在饭店吃饭________________写信给某人________________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 选词填空：go have live love take talk like She_______ in a flat in Beijing. She _______ breakfast at ‎7 a.m. ‎ She _______ to school with her friend. She _______ her cousin Andy very much.‎ She _______ to her classmates at lunchtime. She_______ her dog for a walk every day. She ______ reading. ‎ ‎ 2) 用动词的正确形式填空：‎ My father_______(listen) to the radio every day. ‎ Mike_______ (study) in a middle school. ‎ She______(take) Eddie for a walk after supper. ‎ He_______(wash) clothes with his hands. ‎ Simon ______ (pass) the ball to Daniel. ‎ Miss Li_______ (teach) Chinese. ‎ Look at the animal, it ____ （have）four legs. ‎ 活动二: 要点点击.一般现在时的具体用法： 　　1) 表示现在，目前存在的状态，性质或经常发生的动作或习惯。一般现在时常用下列副词或短语来作时间状语： 例如:　 They do morning exercises every day. 　　他们每天做早操。 ‎ I usually go to school by bus．我通常乘公共汽车上学。 ‎ He often gets up at half past six in the morning．他经常在早上6点半起床。‎ ‎2) 描述人或事物的特征、状态、能力等也用一般现在时，这时不用什么时间状语。‎ 例如:： —How is your mother？你妈妈身体好吗？ —She is fine．Thank you．‎ ‎—What colour is the car？这辆小汽车是什么颜色的？ —It is blue ．是蓝色的。 　　‎ ‎4) 叙述客观事实或普遍存在的真理。‎ 例如:： China is in the east of Asia．中国在亚洲的东部。 ‎ The moon moves around the earth．月亮绕着地球转。‎ Tomorrow is Sunday. 　　明天是星期天。‎ ‎.在一般现在时句中，如果主语是第三人称时，动词要进行变化，变化规则如P 14. 　　行为动词的.一般现在时的句型变化--否定句、一般疑问句、特殊疑问句：‎ 否定句：主语+ don't( doesn't ) +动词原形(+其它)。如：　I don't like bread.‎ 当主语为第三人称单数时，要用doesn't构成否定句。如：　　He doesn't often play.‎ 一般疑问句：Do( Does ) +主语+动词原形+其它。 如： - Do you often play football?　　- Yes, I do. / No, I don't.‎ 当主语为第三人称单数时，要用does构成一般疑问句。 如：　　- Does she go to work by bike?　　- Yes, she does. / No, she doesn't.‎ 特殊疑问句：疑问词+一般疑问句。如：How does your father go to work?‎ 检 测 板 块 用所给词的适当形式填空：‎ ‎1._______Mr. Green _______ (speak) English or Japanese?‎ ‎2.______Li Hong often_____ (carry) water for Uncle Wang?‎ ‎3.He_________ (not come) here on foot today.‎ ‎4.How many of them________ (take) a bus to school?‎ ‎5.Do you want ________ (drink) a bottle of orange now?‎ ‎6.Mr. Green often ______ (catch) the No. 11 bus to work.‎ ‎7.I_____________ (not clever) at Chinese.‎ 按要求改写句子：‎ ‎1.He watches TV every Sunday.(改为一般疑问句并做肯定回答)‎ ‎2.I do my homework every evening.(同上)‎ ‎3.Lucy and Lily come from the USA.(同上)‎ ‎4.She eats two pieces of bread every morning.(同上)‎ ‎5.They do a lot of homework every day.(改为否定句)‎ ‎6.I’m from Nanjing.(改为否定句)‎ ‎7.He often flies to Beijing.(改为否定句)‎ 延 伸 板 块 翻译下列各句并改为否定句和一般疑问句。‎ ‎1）他们星期天去购物. 2）他在工厂上班.‎ ‎3）汤姆和杰克放学后喜欢跳舞. 4）我的英语老师喜欢在网上与朋友聊天.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit1-6‎ 学习内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 1 This is me Integrated skills ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习目标 ‎1. 学会从文章中提取信息。2. 能从听力材料中获取相关信息。‎ ‎3. 能用所得信息将一篇简讯补充完整。4. 使用相关话题进行交际。‎ 学习重难点 词组：football player play for …football team the newest member sports news ‎ World Cup look happy play well score for score goals句型：I want to do … He plays for Huanghe Football Team.Frank plays very well in the match.‎ ‎ Does he often score for our school football team? Yes, he does. ‎ You look happy.‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 翻译短语：‎ 读有关足球方面的书 为黄河足球队效力 最新的成员 为我校球队进球 下一届世界杯 看上去开心 / 难过 / 漂亮 在比赛中 我最喜欢的足球队员 在比赛中踢得好 Simon最喜欢的足球选手 擅长射门 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 ‎1. Who is he? 2. What does he do? ‎ ‎3. Which football team does he play for? 4. Is he the newest member in it? ‎ ‎5. Is he good at scoring goals? 6. What does he want to do? ‎ 词语综合练习：‎ ‎1. Jack is a good _______ (play/player) in our school volleyball team.‎ ‎2. He is the _______ (newest/ newer) member in this football club.‎ ‎3. Henry plays ______ (with/for) Changjiang Football Team.‎ ‎4. Does he often score ______ (goal/goals)?‎ ‎5. Mum looks _______ (happily/happy) every day.‎ ‎6. I have a book _____ (of/about) Bill Gates. I want to learn _______ (more/many) about him. ‎ 用正确的词填空 1. Jack is a good _________(play) in our school volleyball team.‎ 2. He is the __________(new) member in this football club.‎ 3. Does he often score __________.(goal)?‎ 4. Daniel plays computer very __________(good).‎ 5. Yao Ming is a very ________(well) basketball player.‎ 6. Henry plays _________ (with ,for ) Changjiang football team.‎ 7. I have a book _________(of, about )Bill Gates. I want to learn _________(more, many )about him.‎ 检 测 板 块 选择填空：‎ ‎( )1. In summer, he always ____ an hour in the swimming pool every day.‎ ‎ A. swimming at B. swim for C. swims at D. swims for ‎( )2. Xiao Li is crazy about basketball. Yao Ming is ______ favorite basketball player.‎ ‎ A. he B. him C. she D. her ‎( )3. Sandy likes watching TV programs ______ animals.‎ ‎ A. in B. by C. about D. of ‎( )4. My father enjoys reading news ______ sports.‎ ‎ A. on B. with C. for D. at ‎( )5. Mike is ______ member of our class. We are in ______ group.‎ ‎ A. the newest, different B. newest, same ‎ ‎ C. the newest, the different D. the newest, the same ‎( )6. Bill ______ the next football match.‎ ‎ A. wants to wins B. wants to be win C. wants to do D. wants to win ‎( )7. She is going to ______ a singer when she ______ up.‎ ‎ A. do, grow B. is, grow C. be, grows D. be, growing ‎( )8. ______ your teacher ______ happy today?‎ ‎ A. Is, looking B. Does, look C. Are, look D. Does, look at ‎( )9. She doesn’t dance ______ in the dancing contest.‎ ‎ A. good B. fine C. nice D. well ‎( )10. Girls often talk _____ beautiful clothes.‎ ‎ A. on B. about C. to D. at 延 伸 板 块 Sports news ‎ David Beckham ,a well-known (著名的) football player, was born in London on May 2, 1975. He is about 1.80 meters tall. He is very big and strong. He is quite a good football player. He scored a lot of goals for his old team, the National Football Team of England.(英格兰国家足球队) He joined the Real Madrid(皇家马德里队) after he left his old team, he wants to play football in Pairs in the next World Cup Name:‎ Age:‎ Appearance:‎ Birthplace:‎ Old team:‎ New team:‎ Next match:‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit1-7‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 1 This is me Study skills 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1. 培养学生在各种情境中说英语的习惯。‎ ‎2. 能使用日常用语做提示，提要求并对所提出的要求做出回应。‎ 学习 重难点 词汇：rubber borrow say start begin understand 词组：in English the answer to …start a role-play 句型：Do you have a pen? Can I borrow your pen?‎ ‎ I’m sorry. I don’t have one.‎ ‎ Excuse me. How do you say that in English?‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 向某人借某物 如何用英语说某物 讲英语 / 汉语 和某人交谈 谈论某事/某人 叫某人做某事 告诉某人关于某事 在午餐时间 这个问题的答案 练习做某事 讲故事 将某物遗忘在某地 需要做某事 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 ‎(一)用所给词的正确形式填空：‎ ‎ 1. Can you ______ (play) with us ? ‎ ‎ 2. I don’t know how _____ (start) a role-play. ‎ ‎ 3. ______ you _______ (watch) TV in the evening? ‎ ‎ 4. Do you have a ______ (rubber) in your pencil case? ‎ ‎ 5. The question is too difficult. I ______ (not understand) it. ‎ ‎（二）加强日常用语的使用。阅读下列情景，并回答问题：‎ ‎ 1. 当你遇到不会读的单词时，你如何向同学和老师询问？‎ ‎ (Excuse me. How do you say that in English?)‎ ‎ 2. 你的朋友帮你分析难题，你却没听懂，你怎么对他说？‎ ‎ (I don’t understand.)‎ ‎ 3. 英语课上，老师请学生开展对话表演活动。你想参加，该如何说？‎ ‎ (I’ll start/begin now.)‎ ‎ 4. 到了学校突然发现忘带橡皮了，要向同学借，怎么说？‎ ‎ (Can I borrow your rubber?)‎ ‎ 5. 考试结束，有人向你打听考试结果，你根本不知道，该怎么回复他？‎ ‎ (I’m sorry. I don’t know.)‎ ‎（三）Make right responses:‎ ‎1.       If you don’t know how to say something in English, you say: ______________________________ 2.       If you don’t understand something, you say: ___________________________________________‎ ‎3.       If you don’t know the answer to something, you say: _____________________________________ 4.       When you hear some bad news about your friends, you say: _______________________________ 5.       When your friend tells you some good news, you say: ___________________________________ 6.       When your friend tells you your new dress is very nice, you say: ____________________________ 7.       When you want to borrow a rubber from your friend, you say: ____________________________‎ 检 测 板 块 Fill in the blanks: 1.  Millie’s cousin is very c________ at maths. He always gets high scores.(得高分)2.   Our basketball team is the b________ in our school. 3.   Ronaldo is my favourite football p________. 4.   We should be h_______ to the others, like Lei Feng. 5.   He often goes r________ with his mother in the morning. 6.   Niuniu is a m________ of the music club. She loves singing. 7.  There ________(be) some good news in today’s newspaper. 8.   I think swimming is ________(lot) of fun. 9.   I’m always the ________(one) to school. I’m never (从不) late. 10.  Daniel does very well in the ________(sport) meeting. (运动会)‎ 延 伸 板 块 Fill in the blanks with verbs:‎ play draw study be speak grow listen love have wear ‎1.       I want to be a teacher when I ________ up. 2.       Daniel ________ born in China. He is thirteen. 3.       My brother loves ________ pictures. 4.       They are from America. They ________ English. 5.       He ________ to the teacher carefully (认真地) in class. 6.       ________he ________ swimming? No, he doesn’t. 7.       Simon ________ football after school on Tuesday. 8.       Jim and Tom ________ hard at school. 9.       Sandy ________ long hair in a ponytail. 10.   I ________a swimsuit when I go swimming.‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit1-8‎ 学习内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 1 This is me Main task ﹠Checkout 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习目标 ‎1. 学会在写作前先理清思路。‎ ‎2. 能熟练运用本单元所学知识写一篇文章向别人介绍自己。‎ 学习重难点 词组：live in at school listen to CDs play with ‎ lots of live with dark brown eyes all one’s lessons 学 习 过 程 说明 预 习 板 块 在周末 有许多朋友 和我的家人住在一起 努力学习我的所有功课 对某人非常了解 听起来很棒 非常擅长体育运动 我所有的功课 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 Answer the following questions :‎ ‎1. What is her/his name?‎ ‎2. What does she /he like to do?‎ ‎3. How old is she/he ?‎ ‎4. How does she/he look like?‎ 活动二: 要点点击 引导学生讨论写自我的介绍的几个环节: Do you know how to write about yourselves In a student profile? 给学生提供以下步骤供参考。‎ First, you should write about your name, age and where you live.‎ Second, you should write about how you look like.‎ Third, introduce your hobby.‎ Last, you can write about what you often do.‎ Finish off the profile of Chen Hua:‎ ‎1.1‎ Name:‎ Chen Hua English name:‎ John ‎2.2‎ Age:‎ ‎12‎ ‎3.3‎ Appearance:‎ Short black hair; tall, strong ‎4.4‎ Address:‎ On Spring road ‎5.5‎ Hobby:‎ basketball, in the school basketball team ‎6.6‎ Best friend:‎ Liu Hai, play computer games; a member of the Computer Club ‎7.7‎ Hope:‎ a great basketball player like Yao Ming ‎8.8‎ Teacher: ‎ Mr. Li, make English fun John Hello! I’m John. My ________ name is Chen Hua. I’m a boy of 12 ________ old. I ________ short black hair. I enjoy ________ basketball. I’m ________ the school basketball team. I’m ________ and ________.‎ I ________ on Spring Road. It’s quite near the school. I usually ________ to school. I like walking. I ________ enjoy school, and I like all my lessons. Mr. Li ________ me English. He is a good teacher. We all love him. He ________ English fun.‎ My best friend is Liu Hai. He likes________ computer games. He is a ________ of the Computer Club. He wants to be a computer programmer when he ________ up. I hope to ________ a great basketball player like Yao Ming. He is my ________ basketball player.‎ 检 测 板 块 翻译下列句子：‎ ‎1. 她喜欢听音乐，所以我给她买了许多CD。‎ ‎2. 他所有的朋友都喜欢打排球。‎ ‎3. —我能借用你的尺子吗？ — 对不起，我没有。‎ ‎4. 你知道这道题目的答案吗？ 5. 她说我是她最好的朋友。‎ ‎6. 请问，“橡皮”用英语怎么说？‎ ‎7. He often _________ money _________ me.他经常借钱给我。‎ ‎8. The school day ____________________ 8 every morning.学校每天的生活在早上8点开始。‎ ‎9. 我总在网上用英语聊天。I always ________________________ on the Internet.‎ ‎10. 我想成为电脑兴趣小组的一名成员。I want to be ______________________ the computer club.‎ ‎11. 我想把我所有的课程都学好。I want to learn _______________________well. ‎ ‎12. 你很了解你的所有新朋友吗？‎ 延 伸 板 块 用所给单词的适当形式填空：‎ 1. ‎__________your aunts good at __________ (make) cakes?‎ 2. He __________ (not like) __________ (drink) milk.‎ 3. How __________ (be) your grandfather?‎ 4. My little cat really __________ (want) __________ (eat) fish.‎ 5. He __________ (not know) where __________ (sit).‎ 6. Each of us can __________ (sing) an English song.‎ 7. Who __________ (bring) the dog here?‎ 8. There are lots of things for ________ (he) ________ (do) now.‎ 9. Our teacher always __________ (say) every student can ________ (be) very good.‎ 10. ‎________(not late) for school next time.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit1-9‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 1 This is me Checkout 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 复习本单元的知识点。‎ 学习 重难点 本单元的知识点的运用。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 一、根据句意，首字母或中文提示完成单词：‎ ‎1. I have a cat, so I am its m__________ ( 主人 )。‎ ‎2. I was b _______（ come into the world by birth ） in England, but I live in Beijing now.‎ ‎3. Miss Li is polite and h__________ .We all like her.‎ ‎4. I have l__________ ( not short ) black hair.‎ ‎5. Many young girls like playing v__________ ( a kind of sports game ).‎ ‎6. Millie takes her dog for a w__________ ( journey on foot ) every day.‎ ‎7. Simon a __________ ( at all time ) plays football after school.‎ ‎8. Are you a m __________ ( a person belongs to a group ) of the football team?‎ ‎9. Can you see__________ ( 某人 ) in the room?]‎ ‎10. I have l __________ ( many, a lot of ) of friends at No.10 Middle School.‎ 探 究 板 块 二、用所给单词的 适当形式填空：‎ ‎1. Do you know how________ ( clean ) the desk?‎ ‎2. You, she and I ________ ( be ) good friends.‎ ‎3. I like the two ________ ( e-dog ).‎ ‎4. Xiao Huang is good at ________ ( play ) football.‎ ‎5. There are three ________ ( badminton ) in the bag.‎ ‎6. It’s time for Lucy ________ (have )P.E. lesson.‎ ‎7. He often ________ ( draw ) some pictures on the wall.‎ ‎8. Frank wants ________ (play ) in the new match.‎ ‎9. We have two ________ (match )in this week.‎ ‎10.I’ll ________ ( start ) now.‎ ‎11. Amy ________ ( not have ) a computer.‎ 三、同义句转换：‎ ‎1. You should take care of your cat. → You should _______ ________ your cat. ‎ ‎2. I don’t know how I can fly a kite. →I don’t know how _______ ________ a kite.‎ ‎3. His father is from England. → His father ________ ________ England.‎ ‎4. Do you do well in sports?→________ you ________ ________ sports?‎ ‎5. It’s time for a P.E. lesson. → It’s time________ ________a P.E. lesson. ‎ ‎6. Jill is Class 4..Andy is in Class 4, too. → Jill and Andy________ ________ .‎ ‎7. My father goes to work by bus. → My father________ the bus ________ work.‎ ‎8. His father goes home on foot every day. →His father ________ ________ every day.‎ ‎9. My mother and I often fly a kite in the park. →I often________ a kite ________ my mother in the park.‎ ‎10. Tommy is a football player. I like him very much. →Tommy ________ my ‎ ‎________football player.‎ ‎11. Can you lend ( 借 ) me your book? →________I ________ your book?‎ ‎12. My birthday is on January 6 th,1983. → I ________ ________on January 6 th,1983.‎ 检 测 板 块 四、单项选择：‎ ‎（ ）1. Mum，_______ my teacher Miss Li.‎ A. She is B. That is C. This is D. this is ‎( ) 2. Do you know how to ______ your e-dog?‎ A. look at B. look after C. look up D. look over ‎( ) 3. — What class are you in ? —______ .‎ ‎ A. I’m in One Class B. I’m in Class One C. Yes, I am D. No, I’m not ‎( ) 4. Where ______ Andy ______ from?‎ ‎ A. does, is B. does, is come C. does, come D.do, come ‎( )5. Miss Li has long black hair and ______ .‎ ‎ A. wear glasses B. wears glasses C. wear glass D. wears glass ‎( )6. It is time ______ .‎ ‎ A. to go to school B. go to school C. for go to school D. to go to a school ‎( )7. My sister isn’t ______ badminton court. ‎ ‎ A. on B. on the C. in the D. at ‎( )8. They will ______ in a restaurant.‎ ‎ A. have supper B, have a supper C. have the supper D. go supper ‎( )9. Hu Weidong ______ the Nangang Basketball Team.‎ ‎ A. play for B. plays at C. plays with D. plays for ‎( )10.—______ ,can I ask you some questions? —______ ,I don’t have any time now.‎ ‎ A. Excuse me; Excuse me B. Sorry; Excuse me ‎ C. Sorry; I’m sorry D. Excuse me; Sorry ‎( )11. ______ of my classmates like our English teacher.‎ ‎ A. All B . Both C. All of D. Both the ‎( )12. Nancy likes ______ books, but Betty enjoys ______ TV.‎ ‎ A. read, watch B. reading, watching C. looking, watching D. reading, looking ‎( )13.These students are ______ football players. They all play football ______ .‎ ‎ A. good, good B. good, well C. well , good D. well , well 延 伸 板 块 五、根据所给提示词翻译下列句子：‎ ‎ 1. 西蒙每天放学后打球。（ play ）‎ ‎ 2. 他们 经常在足球场上踢足球。（ on the football field ） ‎ ‎ 3. Sandy和她的朋友们每天在羽毛球场上打羽毛球。（ play badminton ）‎ ‎ 4. 在早上我通常跑步半小时。（ go running ）‎ ‎ 5. 我们有时在一个餐馆里吃晚餐。（ have dinner ）‎ ‎ 6. 丹尼尔想要在下次世界杯上踢球。（ play）‎ ‎ 7. 他是阅读俱乐部的最新成员。（ the newest member ）‎ ‎ 8. 他乘公共汽车去上班。（ take a bus ）‎ ‎ 9. 你对你的所有新朋友都很了解吗？（ know sb. well ）‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit2-1‎ 学习 内容 Unit2 My family Welcome to the unit 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 掌握生词：sister brother twin dog cat this my he ‎ ‎2 学会使用This is... , She / He is my ... 句型来介绍他人。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 生词：sister brother twin dog cat this my he ‎ ‎2 介绍他人的句型：This is... , She / He is my ...‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 想一想，一个家庭可能有哪些成员？ 你能说出几个表示家庭成员的单词吗？‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 看课文，找出与下面短语相对应的中文或英文。‎ ‎1 双胞胎姐妹 ________________ 2 你的哥哥（弟弟）____________________ ‎ ‎3 我的妹妹（姐姐）___________ 4 我的猫 ___________________‎ ‎5 你的狗 ____________________ 6 twin brother _____________________‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1 This is Sally . She is my sister .这是萨莉，她是我的姐姐。‎ ‎“This is ….”这是英语中用于介绍人或物的常用句型。当说话人要把一个人介绍给另一个人时，常用“This is … ”这一句型，而不用 “He is … ”或 “She is … ” 。如：This is Jill and that is Lily. 这位是吉尔，那位是莉莉。‎ ‎2 中国人的名字用汉语拼音，若是单名两个字，则用两个字的首字母都要大写，如：Li Lei 。若是双名三个字，后两个字写在一起，姓名的第一个字母都要大写，如：Zhang Lili 。中国人名通常是姓在前面而名在后，但英国人名正好相反，是名在前而姓在后，如：Jim Green，Ann Read，其中Jim和Ann是名，而Green和Read则为姓。因而在书写中文名时一定要注意。‎ ‎3 He is my twin brother . 他是我的双胞胎哥哥。‎ He 是人称代词，指代男性第三人称单数；she 也是人称代词，指代女性第三人称单数。指代物的第三人称单数“它”是it . 但是，现在人们一般把宠物狗、猫当作自己的家庭成员之一，因此也可以用he 或she 来指代，而不用it 。‎ 检 测 板 块 ‎(一)根据中文完成下列句子。‎ ‎1 你好，这是我的好朋友Jack . ‎ Hello ! __________ _________ my good friend , Jack .‎ ‎2 他是你的双胞胎兄弟吗？‎ ‎_________ he your ___________ _____________ ? ‎ ‎3 我们是双胞胎姐妹。 ‎ We _______ _________ _____________ .‎ ‎4 这是我的猫。This is _____________ ____________ .‎ ‎5 那是你的狗。 That is ____________ ____________ .‎ ‎6 这位是Lily ,她是我的孪生姐妹。‎ ‎________ is Lily . ________ ________ my _________ ________.‎ ‎（二）阅读下列短文，回答后面的问题。‎ ‎ I am a girl. My name is Alice. My Chinese name is Xiao Hong. I am a student. My father’s name is Jack and my mother’s ‎ name is Jean. My father is a teacher. My mother is a nurse. We all work hard.‎ ‎1. What’s the girl’s English name? ‎ ‎ _____________________________________‎ ‎2. Is Jack the girl’s father? ‎ ‎ _____________________________________‎ ‎3. What’s her father? ‎ ‎ _____________________________________‎ ‎4. Who’s the girl’s mother? ‎ ‎ _____________________________________‎ ‎5. Is girl’s mother a teacher? ‎ ‎____________________________________‎ 延 伸 板 块 ‎1 找一张家人的合影照，用 This is ... , He / She is ... , His / her name is...把你的家庭成员介绍给你的朋友。‎ ‎2 写出下列词语的缩写形式：‎ ‎1. I am = ________ 2. you are ________ 3. what is _____4. who is ________ 5. he is ________ 6. she is ______7. it is ________ 8. what is ________‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit2-2‎ 学习 内容 Unit2 My family Listening and speaking 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学会更多表示家庭成员的一些词汇。‎ ‎2 初步学会用What is it ? It is ... 句型来谈论物品， 用 Who is he / she ?‎ He / She is ... 句型来谈论人 。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 表示家庭成员的一些词汇 ‎2 用What is it ? It is ... 句型来谈论物品， 用 Who is he / she ?‎ He / She is ... 句型来谈论人 。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 在课文中找出相关的单词填空。‎ ‎1 The father of your father / mother is your ____________‎ ‎2 The mother of your father / mother is your ____________‎ ‎3 The brother of your father / mother is your ____________‎ ‎4 The sister of your father / mother is your ____________ ‎ ‎5 The son of your father’s or mother’s brother’s or sister’s is ‎ your ____________‎ ‎6 The daughter of your father’s or mother’s brother’s or sister’s ‎ is your ____________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 用英语来表达下列句子。‎ ‎1 它是什么？_________________________________‎ ‎2 这是什么？_________________________________‎ ‎3 她是谁？_________________________________‎ ‎4 他是谁？_________________________________‎ ‎5 他是你的爸爸吗？_________________________________‎ 不，他是我的叔叔。_________________________________‎ ‎6 她是你的姑姑吗？_________________________________‎ 是的，她是。_________________________________‎ ‎7. 谁是你的孪生兄弟，Andy 还是Peter?‎ ‎ ____ _____ _____ _____ ______, Andy or Peter?‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1 Who is he / she ? 他/她是谁？‎ Who是疑问代词，引导特殊疑问句，主要用于对人物进行提问。‎ ‎2 What is it ？ 它是什么？‎ What 是疑问代词，引导特殊疑问句，主要用于对物进行提问。‎ （1） 用于对姓名提问，例如：What’s your name ? I’m Lily .‎ （2） 用于对事物提问，例如：What is it ? It’s a photo of my family .‎ （3） 用于对职业提问，例如: What’s your father ? He’s a teacher .‎ ‎3 It’s a photo of my family. 它是我家的一张全家福。‎ ‎（1）it’s是it is的缩写形式，意思是“它是”。注意不要写成its。。‎ ‎（2）a photo of … 一张……的照片，of 表示所属关系。如：‎ a photo of Cousin Tony 托尼表弟的一张照片 a photo of my mother 我妈妈的一张照片 ‎4 Aunt Mary 在英文中，专有名词要大写。这儿A和M都要大写。对某某叔叔，某某阿姨，某某堂兄妹的正确称呼分别是：Uncle Xxx, Aunt Xxx, Cousin Xxx。需注意的是称呼和姓或名首字母都要大写。‎ 检 测 板 块 一、 选择正确的答语完成句子。‎ ‎1 --- ________ is he ? --- He’s my father . ‎ A Who B What C How ‎ ‎2 --- What’s your name ? --- __________ .‎ A Sister B My father C Bob ‎ ‎3 --- Who is he ? --- _________ ‎ A Aunt Mary B Mary Aunt C Cousin Tony ‎ ‎4 This is Kate . She is ________ sister . ‎ A a B I C my ‎ ‎5 --- What’s this ? --- __________ a photo ? ‎ ‎ A It’s B it’s C Its ‎6 --- ________ is your father ? --- He is fine .‎ A What B Who C How ‎ 二、 对下列各句的划线部分提问。‎ ‎1 She is Cousin Mary . _____________________________________ .‎ ‎2 It’s a photo my family . _____________________________________ .‎ ‎3. He’s my twin brother._____________________________________ .‎ ‎4 This is my mother . _____________________________________ .‎ 延 伸 板 块 翻译下面的句子。‎ ‎1 －那是你姑妈吗？－________that your ________?‎ ‎－不，那是我母亲。－No, that’s my ________.‎ ‎2 －这是什么？－________this?‎ ‎－这是我的全家福。－It’s a ________ of my ________‎ ‎3 – 这是你妈妈吗？- Is this _______ _________ ? ‎ ‎ - 是的，她是。Yes , ______ _______ .‎ ‎4 - 她是你的猫吗? ______ it ________ cat ?‎ ‎– 不，它不是。 No, ______ _______ .‎ 在II栏中找出与I栏相对应的答语 I II ‎( )1 What is that ? A She is my sister, Lingling.‎ ‎( )2 What’s your name ? B I’m Helen .‎ ‎( )3 What is Lily ? C It’s a cat .‎ ‎( ) 4 Who is she ? D I’m a nurse .‎ ‎( ) 5 What are you ? E She’s a teacher .‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit2-3‎ 学习 内容 Unit2 My family Reading 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 掌握生词： doctor teacher policeman nurse man woman ‎2 学会用英语询问职业并作答。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 生词： doctor teacher policeman nurse man woman ‎2 询问职业的句型及回答。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 翻译句子 ‎1 这是谁？这是我叔叔。‎ ‎2 这是什么？ 这是我的全家照。‎ ‎3 她是谁？ 是玛丽。‎ ‎ 4 他是你的弟弟吗？不是的 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 根据句意和首字母提示在课本中找到正确的单词填空。‎ ‎1 --- Who is this m _________ ? --- ___________ is my father . ‎ ‎2 --- _______ is your father ? --- He _________ a doctor .‎ ‎3 --- I __________ this your mother ? --- Yes ,s ________ a teacher .‎ ‎4 --- What is your u ________ ? --- ________ a policeman .‎ ‎5 --- Who is this w _________ ? --- __________ my aunt .‎ 对画线提问：‎ ‎1．This is _a photo . _______ ________this?‎ ‎2.My name is _Lin Tao . ________ _______ _______ name?‎ ‎3.She is _my aunt.. _______ _______ she ?‎ ‎4.My father is __a teacher . __________. _________ _______father?‎ 翻译句子：‎ ‎1 你叔叔是干什么的？他是警察。‎ ‎2 她是谁？她是凯特。她是一个护士。‎ ‎3 你姑姑是医生吗？是的 ‎4. 你的表兄是什么职业？‎ ‎ ‎ 活动二: 要点点击 ‎1.Who is this/that man/ woman? 这（那）个男的（女的）是谁？‎ who是疑问代词，用来对某人提问。Who’s是Who is的缩写形式。如：‎ ‎---Who’s he? 他是谁？ ‎ ‎--- He’s my father. 他是我爸爸。‎ ‎2 当询问某人的工作时，我们有以下几种问法。如：‎ What’s your uncle? 你叔叔是做什么的？或What’s your uncle’s job?‎ 或What does your uncle do ?‎ 检 测 板 块 英汉互译：‎ ‎1．a photo of my family____________ 2.my twin sister____________‎ ‎3.my cat___________ 4.一个好医生___________‎ ‎5.谢谢你 ______________ 6.你的奶奶_________________‎ ‎7.我妈妈的妹妹____________________ 8 .凯特的狗_________________‎ ‎9.你的一家__________________ 10.王叔叔__________________‎ 改错 ‎( )1._He__ __is___ __I_ _twin__ brother.‎ A B C D ‎( )2 ._She __ _is___ my ____uncle____ ,_Bob______. ‎ A B C D ‎( )3._Its ___a photo ___of ____my family. ‎ A B C D ‎( )4._What _are _your _father____? ‎ A B C D ‎( )5._What’s _you__ _name?‎ A B C 用适当的疑问词填空：‎ ‎1 ________ is this boy ? He is a student .‎ ‎2 ________ is your mother ? She is fine , thank you .‎ ‎3 ________ are you ? I’m fine .‎ ‎4 ________ is Sally ? She is my twin sister .‎ ‎5 ________ is her name ? Her name is Lucy .‎ ‎6 ________ is it ? It is a dog .‎ 延 伸 板 块 阅读短文，判断正（T）误（F）.（5分）‎ Hello! Please come and meet my family. This is my father, Mr Smith. He is a doctor. This is my mother,Mrs Smith, She is a policewoman. This is my sister. Her name is Joy Smith. She is student. I am a student. I am David Smith. I am a student,too. We love(热爱) our parents(父母亲) and they love us,too.‎ 1. Mr Smith is a policeman.‎ 2. Mrs Smith is a policewoman.‎ 3. David is a student and Joy is a student,too.‎ 4. David and Joy are brother and sister.(兄妹)‎ 根据中文提示写一篇小短文。（5分） ‎ ‎ 我叫李明。我爸爸是医生，我妈妈也是医生。李平是我弟弟。王老师是我的老师。他是一位好老师。 ‎ ‎ （不少于5句）‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit2-4‎ 学习 内容 Unit2 My family The alphabet 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 学习字母Oo-Zz 的正确读音和写法。‎ ‎2 了解一些表示特定意义的字母组合。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 字母Oo-Zz 的正确读音和写法。‎ ‎2 26个字母中相同音归类。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 辨一辨下列字母的异同：‎ g q R P u v w v w u X Y r v O Q ‎ ‎ S Z T I J T W M N W w m z s 理解下列缩写字母的含义（注意大小写）。‎ TV, UN, PRC, USA, VIP,I Q, RMB, WC, IT, PE, , UFO‎, ‎UK, , p.m. CCP, CCTV, EQ, IQ, PE, PLA, PRC, USA, , WTO, .‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 ‎ 写出下列中文词组的英文缩略词 ‎1上午_____________ 2.激光播放 器___________‎ ‎3. 联合国_________ 4.全美篮球协会___________‎ ‎5.香港____________ 6.千克_______________‎ ‎7.肯德基___________ 8.身份证_____________‎ 选出下列每组字母中含有元音音素的种类数（A.一种，B.两种，C.三种，D.四种）。‎ ‎( )1. A C F Z ‎( )2. H L I R ‎( )3. Q U W O ‎( )4. D G T V ‎( )5. K J Y I 活动二: 要点点击 英语26个字母 A) 英语中共有26个字母，其中21个为辅音字母，5个为元音字母，它们分别是：A， E， I， O， U。‎ B)．含有相同音素的字母 ‎/ai/ I Y ‎ ‎/ju:/ Q U W ‎ ‎/ei/ A H J K ‎ ‎/e/ F L M N S X Z ‎ ‎/i:/ B C D E G P T V ‎ 检 测 板 块 一、从A，B，C，D中选出含有相同音素的选项。‎ ‎( ) 1. A. ag B. bt C. df D. ir ‎( ) 2. A. bd B. dm C. gh D. jp ‎( ) 3. A. mu B. sx C. cj D. zp ‎( ) 4. A. hl B. eq C. lm D. nt ‎( ) 5. A. ta B. sw C. vh D. fs 二、写出下列缩写词的中文意思。‎ ‎1. UN ____________________ 2. KFC ____________________‎ ‎3. TV ____________________ 4. HK ____________________ ‎ ‎5. a.m. _____________________6. kg ____________________‎ ‎7. p.m. _____________________8. IQ ____________________‎ ‎9. US ____________________ 10. RMB ____________________‎ 三、按要求改写下列句子。‎ ‎1. name, is, what, your (连词成句)‎ ‎ ‎ ‎2. you, father, are, Lily’s (连词成句)‎ ‎_____________________________________________________________‎ ‎3. My cousin is a policeman. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎_________ _________your cousin?‎ ‎4. The boy is Peter’s cousin. (对划线部分提问) _______ _______ the boy?‎ ‎5. What is your mother? (改为同义句) What is your _____ ______? .‎ ‎6.This is my father . ( 改成一般疑问句) _____this ______father ? ‎ ‎7.That’s a desk . (对画线部分提问) ______ ______ that ? ‎ ‎8.I’m Lily. (同义句转换) My ______ _______ Lily.‎ 延 伸 板 块 翻译下列各句：‎ ‎1.---你爸爸是干什么的？--- 一名医生。‎ ‎ _________your father ? ______a doctor.‎ ‎2.---那位妇女是谁？ ---她是我的姑妈。‎ ‎ ________that______? _____my_____. ‎ ‎3. 这是一张我的全家福。‎ This is ______ ______ ______ my family.‎ ‎4.他们是你的叔叔们，对吗？‎ They are __________ uncles, __________?‎ ‎5.你的表兄是什么职业？‎ ‎__________ is _________ __________?‎ ‎6.谁是你的孪生兄弟?‎ ‎________ your_______brother?‎ ‎7. －你表哥是警察，对吗？－不，他是个老师。‎ ‎－Your ________ is a ________, ________?‎ ‎－No, he is a ________.‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）7A Unit3-1‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit3 Let’s celebrate Welcome to the unit ﹠ vocabulary 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1 了解中外一些重要的节假日，节假日的背景及主要庆祝方式。‎ ‎2 掌握一年中几个主要节日的名称并了解其日期。‎ ‎3 能就有关“个人对节日的喜好”情况相互进行简单询问及回答。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 谈论个人对节假日的喜好情况。‎ ‎2 能根据相关情景，正确地理解，区分相应的节假日名称。 3. 能初步在情景中运用本课所学的互相询问节假日的交际用语。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 翻译词组：‎ ‎1．让我们一起庆祝 _______________2．装扮成一个鬼___________________‎ ‎3．你最喜欢的节日 _______________4．制作一张海报________________‎ ‎5．在感恩节 ________________ 6．特殊的日子_______________‎ ‎7．你自己的主意 ______________ 8．喜欢吃月饼_____________________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 一、填写合适的节日名称。‎ ‎1 At ____________ , we can get many presents from the stockings .‎ ‎2 At ____________ , we eat rice dumplings in China .‎ ‎3 At ____________ , the children will play a trick on others .‎ ‎4 At ____________ , we eat mooncakes .‎ ‎5 At ____________ , we eat turkey .‎ ‎6 At ____________ , people play with boats on the river .‎ ‎7 At ____________ , Chinese people give “red packet ”and let off fireworks.‎ 二、根据句意和所给的提示完成单词。‎ ‎1 It’s October 31st today . It is __________.‎ ‎2 How do you always ________(庆祝) the Chinese New Year ?‎ ‎3 People eat m ________ on Mid-Autumn Festival .‎ ‎4 I hear there are some __________(鬼) in the forest .‎ ‎5 Boys would like to d _________ as Monkey King .‎ ‎6 Children get many presents on ___________ (圣诞节).‎ ‎7 I like Dragon Boat Festival very much . Which is your favourite f________?‎ ‎8 The teacher tells us an _________ (有趣的) story .‎ ‎9 ________ (作为) a student , you should study hard.‎ ‎10 How do they spend _________ (感恩节)?‎ 三、按要求完成句子。‎ ‎1) They are making pumpkin lanterns in the classroom.（对划线部分提问）_________________________________________________________________‎ ‎2) They like Chinese food very much.（对划线部分提问） ___________________________________________________________‎ ‎3) 那天，孩子们都装扮成美猴王。‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________ ‎ ‎4) 你最喜欢什么节日？ 我最喜欢的节日是感恩节。‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________‎ ‎5) 让我们一起来庆祝万圣节吧。‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________ ‎ ‎6) 谢谢你帮助我庆祝我的生日。‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________ ‎ ‎7）我不得不帮我妈妈做家务，因为她很忙。‎ ‎___________________________________________________________________‎ ‎8) 请告诉我关于世界各地不同的节日。‎ ‎___________________________________________________________________‎ 检 测 板 块 一、单项选择：‎ ‎( )1. Jim with his good friends _____ helpful. They often help me ____ my homework.‎ ‎ A. is, with B. are, with C. is, of D. are, of ‎( ) 2. What do you often do _______ Halloween?‎ ‎ A. on B. at C. in D. with ‎( ) 3. I will go to work early tomorrow. Can you _____my baby in the morning. A. put on B. dress C. wear D. dress in ‎( ) 4. Look! The young girl is dressing up _______ an old woman ______ a black coat.‎ ‎ A. as, in B. as, of C. in, as D. in, of ‎( ) 5. It’s late. Let him ________ home now.‎ ‎ A. goes B. to go C. go D. going ‎( ) 6. It is ________ interesting plan, so I don’t want ________ it.‎ ‎ A. an, to miss B. a, to miss C. an, miss D. a, miss ‎( ) 7. They are having a trip ________ the world.‎ ‎ A. from B. in C. of D. around ‎( ) 8. ---- How often do you go shopping? ---- ________‎ ‎ A. Tow hours B. Once a month C. Once D. Today ‎( ) 9. What do you have ___ breakfast? What do you do ____ breakfast?‎ ‎ A. in, for B. for, for C. for, at D. for, on ‎( )10. –Let me help you with your English. ----- ________.‎ ‎ A. That’s all right B. Not at all C. I don’t know D. Thank you, but I can do it. ‎ 延 伸 板 块 词汇：‎ ‎1. It is __________ (重要的)to learn English well.‎ ‎2. Let’s _________ (buy) some Halloween chocolates tonight .‎ ‎3. One of the important ____________ (节日) in China is Spring Festival.‎ ‎4. ___________(庆祝) Halloween is very interesting.‎ ‎5. Tom ______ (speak) very good English.‎ ‎6. You can play tricks on your friends at April ________ (Fool) day. ‎ ‎7. Thank you for ________ (help) me with my homework.‎ ‎8. 1 October is our ________ (nation) Day. ‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）7A Unit3-2‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit3 Let’s celebrate Reading (A)‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1. 听、说、读、写单词USA，special, shout, if, face, own, cut, sharp(adj),tooth, chocolate, winter, drink,短语cutout并了解其含义。能听懂、会说单词trick, treat, knock, candy, mask, paint, lantern, sharp(n)短语trick or treat，play a trick。能理解单词costume, pumpkin。 2. 能正确理解本课课文，就获取的信息进行相互询问及回答。 3. 能通过本课学习，对英语国家的文化习俗产生兴趣。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1. 能通过阅读准确获取信息并能基本正确地朗读课文。‎ ‎2. 能在教师的指导下，简单地复述故事。‎ ‎3. 能通过对西方节日及庆祝方式的进一步了解和中外文化对比，加深对中国文化的理解 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 一、翻译词组：‎ ‎1．谢谢你告诉我 _____________ 2．举行一次特殊的晚会____________‎ ‎3．万圣节快乐_________________ 4．玩一个叫做“不招待就使坏”的游戏________‎ ‎5．敲人们的门 _______________ 6．给我们糖作为礼物__________________‎ ‎7．招待我们__________________ 8．捉弄他们__________________‎ ‎9．制作我们自己的南瓜灯______________ 10．穿着特殊的带面具的戏服__________‎ ‎11. paint faces __________________________ 12. cut out _____________________‎ ‎13. have a party ____________________ 14. on the evening of October 31st 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 Answer the following questions :‎ Paragraph1: What’s Wendy’s favourite festival?‎ When is Halloween ? Paragraph2: How do you play the game called “trick or treat”? Paragraph3: How do they dress up at Halloween? Paragraph4: How do you make your own pumpkin lantern?‎ What do people do with pumpkin? Paragraph5: What do they eat on that day?‎ Vocabulary:‎ ‎1. Would you like __________( drink) some juice?‎ ‎2. Would you _________ (play) computer games with me?‎ ‎3. They don’t have much homework _________ (do) today.‎ ‎4. This pair of trousers _________ (be) mine.‎ ‎5. Halloween is his ______________(最喜欢的) festival.‎ ‎6. The teacher lets him _________ (tell) us a story.‎ ‎7. One of them __________ (be) good at __________ (swim).‎ ‎8. Thanks for __________ ( dress) my son.‎ ‎9. He is busy _________ (get) ready for the exam.‎ ‎10. It is good for you ___________ (exercise) more.‎ ‎11. They look like _______________( 猴子)。‎ ‎12 .We were making ___________ (脸) when the teacher came in.‎ ‎13. He knocks on ___________ (人们) windows to play jokes(开玩笑)。‎ ‎14. People have mooncakes on _________________( 中秋节)。‎ 检 测 板 块 单项选择：‎ ‎( ）1．Children wear special clothes _____ masks _____ Halloween.‎ ‎ A. with, at B. On, from C. At, to D. On, to ‎( ) 2. Thank you very much for ________ us.‎ ‎ A. help B. helping C. to help D. helps ‎( ) 3. They don’t know _________ use the computer.‎ ‎ A. how B. how to C. what to D. what ‎( ) 4. I was born _________ the morning of September 1ST.‎ ‎ A. / B. on C. at D. on ‎( ) 5. Anna enjoys _________ volleyball.‎ ‎ A. play B. plays C. playing D. to play ‎( ) 6. My brother always has __________.‎ ‎ A. many homeworks to do B. much homework doing ‎ C. many homeworks doing D. much homework to do ‎( ) 7. Would you like __________ with me?‎ ‎ A. to go swim B. to go swimming C. going swimming D. go swimming ‎( ) 8. _________ pen is ______, Lily’s or mine?‎ ‎ A. Who’s; good B. Who’s; better C. Whose; good D. Whose; better 延 伸 板 块 根据每段提示复述课文：‎ Paragraph 1: People celebrate Halloween in the _______. It is on __________.‎ Paragraph 2: play, ‘trick or treat’, knock on, shout, give, treat, not give, play a trick on Paragraph 3: dress up, wear, costumes, masks, paint, tiger costume Paragraph 4: pumpkin lanterns, cut out, eyes, nose, teeth Paragraph 5: have a party, Oct. 31st, starts, eat, chocolates, candies, drinks, food 根据课文填空：‎ The people in the USA do not celebrate________, but they celebrate______.They have a special________ on _______.The children play a game called ________.Usually, people give them ________. If they don’t, the children can _______ on them.The children always ________ at Halloween. They wear ________with masks. They sometimes ______ _____and people do not know who they are. This year, Wendy will wear ________.They make their own________.‎ They cut out________ __________.The family always have a _______ on the __________. It usually starts at ______.They eat _________ __________. They have _________and eat__________. They do not eat _________‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）7A Unit3-3‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit3 Let’s celebrate Reading B ﹠C 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1. 能熟练掌握和理解上一课所学的语言知识并进行交际运用。 2. 能进一步熟悉和了解西方节日及主要庆祝方式，逐步增强自己的世界文化意识。 3. 能正确理解与上一课内容相当的课外短文并准确搜集信息。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1. 复习巩固上一课所学单词、短语。 2. 能流利地运用所学语言表达不同的情景。‎ ‎3. 能通过阅读获取简单的信息 。 4. 能在交流中用英语介绍祖国传统文化 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 词组翻译：‎ 用刀挖出尖牙 一个叫Lily的女孩 ‎ 告诉他关于中秋节的事 一份特殊的礼物 ‎ 在万圣节前夜 用玻璃制作杯子 ‎ 在4月1日傍晚 玩一个不招待就使坏的游戏 ‎ 喜欢热饮 涂墙 ‎ 跟我最好的朋友开一个玩笑 举行一个晚会来庆祝儿童节 ‎ 做南瓜灯 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 一、 用适当的介词填空。‎ ‎(1). Thank you for telling me _____ Mid-Autumn Festival.‎ ‎(2). We don’t go to school _____ October 1st.‎ ‎(3). Listen! Someone is knocking ____ the door.‎ ‎(4). Usually, they give us some candies ____ a treat.‎ ‎(5). It’s impolite (不礼貌的) to play a trick _____ your father. ‎ ‎(6). Wendy and her friends always dress ____ _____ Halloween.‎ ‎(7). We wear special costumes _____ masks.‎ ‎(8). – How do you make a pumpkin lantern?‎ ‎ -- Cut ____ the eyes, the nose and the sharp teeth.‎ ‎(9). I often get some cards _____ the morning of May 10th. Because it is my birthday.‎ ‎(10). I usually get up ____ ‎6 a.m. ‎ 二、根据句意、首字母或中文，写出单词的正确形式。‎ ‎1. We _______________ ( 庆祝 )Halloween in the USA..‎ ‎2. The man c______________ Gao Lishun is our principal.‎ ‎3. We clean our ____________ (tooth) every morning.‎ ‎4. He often __________ up as a tiger at Halloween. But he is ________up as a ghost today. (dress)‎ ‎5. J___________ comes before February. It’s the ________ (one) month of the year.‎ ‎6. Thank you for _______ (make) so many model planes for the poor children.‎ ‎7. ___________ Day is on October 1st in China.‎ ‎8. Wendy wear a s__________ costume at Halloween.‎ ‎9. It’s an i__________ story.‎ ‎10. Cold ____________ (饮料) are not good for children.‎ 检 测 板 块 翻译句子：‎ ‎1. 你们通常为圣诞节做什么？我们会举办聚会。‎ ‎______________________________________________________________‎ ‎2. 你拿什么招待你们的朋友？‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________‎ ‎3. 我们住在一个叫苏州的城市。‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________‎ ‎4.为什么不和他们开个玩笑呢？‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________‎ ‎5.我们为中秋节制作了一些特殊的月饼。‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________‎ ‎6. 他把玩具小狗的脸涂成了白色。‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________‎ ‎7．孩子们用刀雕刻出眼睛和尖利的牙齿。‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________ ‎ ‎8．他们通常在圣诞节相互送礼物庆祝。‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________ ‎ ‎9．在万圣节，穿一件老虎的戏服是非常棒的。‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________‎ ‎10．在冬天，大多数人喜欢喝热的饮料，吃热的食物。‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________ ‎ 延 伸 板 块 写出下列句子的同意句。‎ 1. Let’s celebrate it.‎ 2. ‎=_____________ ____________ celebrating it?‎ ‎=____________ ___________ celebrate it?‎ ‎=____________ we celebrate it?‎ ‎2. Thank you for helping us study our English.‎ ‎__________ for __________ us___________ our English.‎ ‎3. Halloween is her favourite festival.‎ ‎=She ________Halloween________.‎ ‎4. He gives me some flowers as a present.‎ ‎=He gives some flowers ___________ __________ as a presents.‎ ‎=He gives me ________ _________ _________ some flowers.‎ ‎5. Daniel wears a lion costume.‎ ‎=Daniel ________ ________ a lion costume.‎ ‎6. I will learn more about Halloween.‎ ‎=I _________ __________ _________study more about Halloween.‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）7A Unit3-4‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit3 Let’s celebrate Grammar A 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1. 能听、说、读、写单词date, season, spring, summer, autumn, January, February, March, April, June, July, August, September, November, December, Sunday, Saturday并了解其含义。使学生能听懂、会说单词during 。 2.; 使学生能初步掌握介词at ,on, in表达时间的用法及在不同交际情景中的运用功能。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1 能熟练运用介词谈论时刻、月份、年份、季节，相互进行信息交流。 2 能正确理解图表所提供的信息。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 词组翻译：‎ 一、翻译词组：‎ ‎1. 早饭的时候看报纸 ________ 2. 看医生________________‎ ‎3. 带狗出去散步 __________ 4. 有一个长的假期________________‎ ‎5. 一起学习数学 ___________ 6. 举行一次盛大的聚会_______‎ ‎7. 去度假 ________________8. 穿着特殊服装的人_______‎ ‎9. 给一些红包 ________________10. 每周一和周五________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 用适当的介词填空。 1) I’m going to get up _____ 5 o'clock tomorrow morning. 2) My sister’s birthday is ______ 8th September. 3) ______ Sundays we often play games _____ our friends. 4) ______ New Year’s Day we have a holiday. 5) I don’t do anything ______ Sunday morning. 6) Chinese people eat moon cakes _______ Mid-autumn Festival. 7) We will have a special party ______ October 31th. 8) My friends and I often dress up _______ Halloween. 9) Dragon Boat Festival is _____ May. 10) She left her parents ______ ten. 11) My grandparents was born ______ 1939. 12) _____ winter, children like to make a snow-man. 13) I always take Mimi for a walk _____ the evening.‎ ‎14). Our school day starts ________ 8:‎00 a.m.‎ ‎15). How many days are there ________ October?‎ ‎16). My mother gets up early ________ the morning.‎ ‎17). I was born ________ the morning of April the first.‎ ‎18). He gives e a book ________ a present.‎ 动词填空 ‎1. I’m ________ (dress) up as a ghost.‎ ‎2. I like Mid-Autumn Day because I like ________(eat) mooncakes.‎ ‎3.Thank you for ________(help) me with my homework.‎ ‎4. We all know the boy ______ (call ) Robinson.‎ ‎5. Let him ________(make) some lanterns out of big pumpkins.‎ ‎6. We know each other by ________(chat) on the ICQ.‎ ‎7. Please make the plan before you start ________(write)‎ ‎8. Can he ________(borrow) money from his parents if he doesn’t have any?‎ 检 测 板 块 选择填空：‎ ‎（ ）1. It is very cold. Would you like ________?‎ ‎ A. any hot drinks B. some hot drinks C. any hot drink D. some hot drink ‎( ) 2. Mum and I go shopping ____ Sundays, but we will go fishing _____this Sunday.‎ ‎ A. on, on B. in, in C. on, / D. in, /‎ ‎( ) 3. Kitty wants to know _______ Halloween.‎ ‎ A. many about B. a lot of C. a lot about D. much ‎( ) 4. She often gets up early ______ the morning and goes to sleep late _____ night.‎ ‎ A. in, in B. in, at C. at, at D. at, in ‎( ) 5.He meets up with his old friend ________ today.‎ ‎ A. / B. on C. in D. at ‎( ) 6. Our meeting _______ at 3:00and _______ at 6:00.‎ ‎ A. start, finishes B. start, finish C. starts, finishes D. starts, finish ‎( ) 7. ---- ________ does Tom go to school? ---- by bike.‎ ‎ A. When B. What C. where D. How ‎( ) 8. ---- May I have ________ water? ----Sure.‎ ‎ A. any B. some C. lot of D. many ‎( )9. ______ do you like , the red one or the blue one?‎ ‎ A. What B. Which C. Why D. Whose ‎( )10. They live _______ Nanjing Road ______ Shanghai.‎ ‎ A. on, in B. on, on C. at, in D. in, in 延 伸 板 块 用介词in, on或at填空 ‎1. Peter will go to the cinema the afternoon.‎ ‎2. He was born January, 1993 .‎ ‎3. We often watch TV news 7 p. m.‎ ‎4. The festival is October 31 st.‎ ‎5. Birds fly to the south autumn.‎ ‎6. He will have his party the afternoon of June 15 th.‎ ‎7. I always give my friends presents Christmas.‎ ‎8. My father sometimes reads newspapers breakfast.‎ ‎9. She started to learn English 14.‎ ‎10. We have a long holiday July.‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）7A Unit3-5‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit3 Let’s celebrate Grammar B ﹠C 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1. 能听、说、读、写单词cook, fishing, by, 短语by bus 并了解其含义。能听懂、会 说单词 skateboard。 2. 能熟练地运用‘wh–’questions互相交流有关人或事物的信息。 3. 能结合本单元中心话题，用所学语言知识进行交际。 4. some与any在不同句式中的使用。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1. 能理解what, which, who, whose, when, where, why, how 等疑问词的不同含义，掌握其 基本用法。 2. 能正确区分some与any在不同句式中的使用。 3. 能基本理解“some”在疑问句中的特殊含义。 4. 能根据不同的情景，正确地使用‘wh–’questions。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 根据句意以及汉语提示，完成下列句子 ‎1. I will go to Beijing during (八月的第一个星期).‎ ‎2. Can you play football with me (在星期三).‎ ‎3. Eric’s birthday is （在十月六日）.‎ ‎4. I’m going to （看医生）at three o’clock this afternoon.‎ ‎5. I always (带Eddie去散步)on Sunday.‎ 根据句意及汉语提示填写下列单词 ‎1. There are twelve (月)in a year.‎ ‎2. Which (季节)do you like best in a year?‎ ‎3. They often give their children (礼物)at Christmas.‎ ‎4. We have a long (假日)in October.‎ ‎5. Eric’s birthday is on (星期二).‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 回答下列问题：‎ ‎1.What is your name? ‎ ‎2.How old are you? ‎ ‎3.When is your birthday?‎ ‎4.Where do you live? 5.Which is your favourite sport? ‎ ‎6.Who is your favourite star? ‎ ‎7.What do you do on Sunday? ‎ ‎8.Why do you like Mid–Autumn Festival?‎ ‎9.Why do you like the Dragon Boat Festival? 10.How do you celebrate Christmas ? 11.When is Chinese New Year this year? ‎ 句型转换：‎ ‎1. The boy in red is my brother. boy is your brother?‎ ‎2. We celebrate Chinese New Year by making and eating dumplings. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ _______ you celebrate Chinese New Year?‎ ‎3. I can see five pumpkins in the classroom(对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ pumpkins can you see in the classroom?‎ ‎4. The red coat is mine. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ is the red coat?‎ ‎5. At Mid-Autumn Festival we eat mooncakes. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ you eat at Mid-Autumn Festival?‎ ‎6. I like Mid-Autumn Festival. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ you ?‎ ‎7. There’s some bread on the table. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ is there on the table?‎ ‎8. His father works in an office. (对划线部分提问) works in an office?‎ ‎9. The boy looks like a cat. (对划线部分提问) the boy like?‎ ‎10. It is Thursday today. (对划线部分提问) is it today.‎ 检 测 板 块 用some 或any 填空：‎ ‎1. Do you have ____________ new books?‎ ‎2. There aren’t ____________ meat in the fridge.‎ ‎3. May I drink ____________ juice?‎ ‎4. Would you like ___________ tea?‎ ‎5. He doesn’t like playing ___________ ball games.‎ ‎6. Does he want __________mooncakes ?‎ ‎7. I need ____________ help now.‎ ‎8. Why do you want _____________ stamps?‎ 根据句义及首字母填空 ‎1. People in the w______ don’t celebrate the Mid-Autumn Festival.‎ ‎2.He is putting twelve c_______ in a big birthday cake.‎ ‎3. The little child likes to knock on his n_________ doors.‎ ‎4. He is very e______ because there’s no homework today.‎ ‎5.It is sunny today. The sun is s_______.‎ 延 伸 板 块 用a ,an , some , any 完成对话。 A: What’s in the fridge ? B: Let me see . There are _____ cakes in it . A: Is there ____cup of coffee? B: No , there isn’t . Is there any fruit ? A: Yes , I think there is . there are ______ pears . B: Good , Is there _____ potato? A: No , there aren’t ______ potatoes . But there are ______ tomatoes. B: Is there _____ empty glass in it ? A: Yes there is . Do you want it ? B: Yes , I want to drink some coffee.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）7A Unit3-6‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit3 Let’s celebrate Integrated skills 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1. 能听、说、读、写单词 lion, midnight, happen并了解其含义。能听懂, 会说单词packet traditional, excited.能理解单词Chinatown. 2. 能听懂与本单元中心话题有关的语段，利用所给提示，获取简单的信息。 3. 能通过阅读短文或海报，了解海外中国传统节日的庆祝方式，提高对中外文化异同的 鉴别能力，增强自己对民族文化的自豪感。 4. 能相互交流有关“个人对节日的喜爱”信息。 4. 能熟练运用“wh-questions”进行详细询问和应答。 5. 用favourite一词来表达偏好。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1. 通过对话题How to celebrate Chinese New Year的听、说、读、写综合训练，培养学生综合运用语言的能力。 2. 阅读一份在纽约欢度春节的海报，找出其中的要点，并写出贺卡。 3. 听有关在纽约庆祝春节的广播节目。 4. 用wh-问句和favourite一词来谈论一年中最喜欢的日子。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 翻译下列词组 ‎1. 中国食品 ‎ ‎2. 观看舞龙灯 ‎ ‎3. 中国新年庆祝会 ‎ ‎4. 在晚上 ‎ ‎5. 从9点到午夜 ‎ ‎6. 在纽约中国城 ‎ ‎7. 得到许多礼品 ‎ ‎9. 新年的庆祝活动 _______________‎ ‎11. 通过收音机 ____________ ‎ ‎13. 在这一年里______________‎ ‎15. 我第一次去 _______________ ‎ ‎8. 举行聚会 ‎ ‎10. 许多有趣的事情____________‎ ‎12. 看烟火 _________________‎ ‎14. 在度假________________‎ ‎16. 得到许多礼物_____________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 根据句意及中文提示填写下列单词 ‎1. We always get some (钱)at Chinese New Year.‎ ‎2. Are there any Hallowween (聚会)in Beijing?‎ ‎3. There are lots of (有趣)things here.‎ ‎4. It is my (三)time to see the lion dance.‎ ‎5. There will be (烟火)in Chinatown.‎ ‎6. Tomorrow is my birthday, I feel very (激动).‎ ‎7. The boy has four (牙齿).‎ ‎8. —I don’t remember the (日期)of it.—On June 8th.‎ ‎.词性变换：‎ ‎1.Thank him for _____________(make) me the pumpkin lantern.‎ ‎2.He often_______________ (have) a party on his birthday.‎ ‎3.______________ she _____________( like) her mother? Yes, they look the same.‎ ‎4.It’s also important _______________( drink) lots of water every day .‎ ‎5.I’d like_______________( talk) with you on the phone.‎ ‎6.A: What are you doing?B: I am ______________(dress) up as a ghost.‎ ‎7.They _________________( watch) TV from Monday to Friday.‎ ‎8.It often takes us one hour ________________( cook) supper.‎ ‎9.Don’t_______________( turn) on the radio. The baby is sleeping.‎ ‎10.Can he finish ________________( read) the story book today?‎ 检 测 板 块 单项选择：‎ ‎( )1. ______ does your mother go shopping? Seldom.‎ ‎ A. How many B. How often C. How much D. How long ‎( ) 2. Let’s talk about the difference ___ English names and Chinese names.‎ ‎ A. of B. between C. for D. from ‎( ) 3. He ______ his homework _______ Sunday.‎ ‎ A. don’t do, at B. doesn’t do, on C. isn’t do, in D. does, of ‎( ) 4. My favourite food ________ dumplings and rice.‎ ‎ A. have B. has C. is D. are ‎( ) 5. I would like tea ________ nothing in it.‎ ‎ A. has B. have C. without D. with ‎( ) 6. Kitty always eats hamburgers ________ lunch.‎ ‎ A. to B. for C. have D. at ‎( ) 7. Does it take you half an hour ___ your homework in the evening?‎ ‎ A. to finish B. finishing C. finish D. finishes ‎( ) 8. Eating too many candies ________ not good for your health.‎ ‎ A. is B. are C. have D. has ‎( ) 9. Mike and John ________ good at Maths.‎ ‎ A. are all B. are both C. all are D. both are ‎( )10. Could I ask you _________ questions, Mrs Black?‎ ‎ A. some B. any C. a D. an 用所给动词的适当形式填写 ‎1. She spends two hours (play) the piano every day.‎ ‎2. Let’s (celebrate) Halloween.‎ ‎3. It is his last time (play) football.‎ ‎4. Who (give) you lots of presents on your birthday?‎ ‎5. Look! She (cut) some meat into pieces.‎ ‎6. If you want (make) a pumpkin lantern, you should (cut) out some shapes (make) the eyes, the sharp teeth.‎ ‎7. He always (dress) up at Children’s Day.‎ ‎8. Our party (not start) at four o’clock. It starts at five.‎ ‎9. Here (be) what they do every week.‎ ‎10. Thank you for (tell) me something about your school.‎ 延 伸 板 块 ‎1．四人一组，设计一张节日海报，要求包含the date , the place , the clothes people wear , the special food they eat , the special thing they do . 2. 鼓励有能力的学生以Millie 的口吻，回复一张明信片给Wendy ，告诉她北京庆祝新年 的情况。‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）7A Unit3-7‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit3 Let’s celebrate Main task 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1. 能听、说、读、写单词west, way, usually, through,短语in the west, in manyways,并了解其含义。能听懂、会说单词 neighbour, shine。 2. 让学生了解通过列一个写作计划来编排信息。 3. 通过制作写作计划和完成海报样本来培养学生写作的创新技能。 4. 设计并制作一张海报。 5. 要求学生能写出有关节日及庆祝方式的段落。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1. 要求学生掌握本课时有关生词和短语。 2. 培养学生笔头表达思想的能力。 3. 能通过阅读Millie节日海报内容的写作提纲，了解海报的写作方式。 4. 能模仿所学短文，运用新单词或短语进行局面书面表达。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 词组翻译：‎ （1） When is Halloween?‎ （2） Is the USA in the west of the world? ‎ （3） How do people celebrate Halloween ?‎ （4） How do people play ‘trick or treat’?‎ （5） How do people make pumpkin lanterns?‎ （6） Do you know why they put candles in them?‎ （7） Do you know how to make a poster?‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 翻译下列词组 ‎1. 西方人 ‎ ‎2. 用许多方式 ‎ ‎3. 举办万圣节晚会 ‎ ‎4. 搞恶作剧 ‎ ‎5. 挖出眼睛的形状 ‎ ‎6. 得到款待 ‎ ‎7. 装扮 ‎ ‎8. 做南瓜灯 ‎ ‎9. 在‎7月15日晚上 ‎ ‎10. 在第一个星期内 ‎ 用所给动词的适当形式填空 ‎1. Thank you for (come) to my party.‎ ‎2. He enjoys (swim) very much.‎ ‎3. Does he (have) any money?‎ ‎4. The girl wants (be)a teacher when he grows up.‎ ‎5. When the people (have) the party every year?‎ ‎6. Mother asks me not (play) tricks on others.‎ ‎7. Let him (do) his homework by himself.‎ ‎8. I think it is his first time (give)a talk in class.‎ ‎9. My father is good at (play) basketball.‎ ‎10. —What he often (do) in the evening? —He (watch) TV.‎ ‎6. Kitty can (go) to the Computer Club today.‎ 检 测 板 块 翻译句子：‎ ‎1. 我们可以用纸来制作卡片。‎ ‎2. 在春节的时候他没有拿到红包。‎ ‎3. 请不要捉弄别人。‎ ‎4. 请试着记住黑板上的句子。‎ ‎5. 这是他第一次看电影。‎ 单项选择：‎ ‎（ ）1. I can’t see ______ on the blackboard, because I don’t bring my ________here.‎ ‎ A. something, glass B. anything, glass C. something, glasses D. anything, glasses ‎( ) 2. Would you like to give me ________ help?‎ ‎ A. some B. any C. many D. much ‎( ) 3. There isn’t ________ work to do here. You may go home now ‎ A. many B. little C. lot of D. much ‎( ) 4. Who ________ English well?‎ ‎ A. speak B. say C. speaks D. says ‎( ) 5. Millie isn’t here today. She is ________ a holiday in Shanghai.‎ ‎ A. in B. at C. for D. on ‎( ) 6. It is _________ Day today.‎ ‎ A. Teacher’s B. Teachers’ C. Teacher D. Teachers’s ‎( ) 7. __________ night, there will be fireworks in Chinatown.‎ ‎ A. In B. In one C. At D. At the ‎( ) 8. ---- ________ go for a walk with us? ---- OK.‎ ‎ A. How about B. What about C. Why don’t D. Why not ‎( ) 9. ---- Must I go shopping now? ---- __________.‎ ‎ A. No, you mustn’t B. No, you must C. No, you needn’t D.Yes, you need ‎( ) 10. ----Can you give the orange ________ me? ---- Of course it is _______you.‎ ‎ A. for, for B. to, to C. for, to D. to, for 延 伸 板 块 完成对话 A: 1 ?‎ B: My favourite is the Mid-Autumn Festival.‎ A: 2 ?‎ B: We celebrate it on the 15th day of the eighth lunar month.‎ A: 3 ?‎ B: We celebrate it by eating moon cakes.‎ A: 4 mooncakes?‎ B: Yes, I like them very much.‎ A: 5 for the Mid-Autumn Festival?‎ B: We also have a big dinner with our family.‎ A: Oh! That’s wonderful.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）7A Unit3-8‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit3 Let’s celebrate study skills ﹠project﹠Check out 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1. 能尝试使用适当的学习方法，克服学习中的困难。 2. 能熟练运用 “wh- ”questions进行详细询问和应答以及时间介词。 3. 复习与节日相关的词汇。 4. 能就本单元的内容进行自我检测，评价，体验进步与成功。‎ 学习 重难点 1 能复习巩固所学的语言知识。‎ 2 能综合运用本单元所学的单词、短语以及语法项目。‎ 3 复习时间介词at/on/in、‘wh–’questions, ’some’/ ’any’ 的含义及功能。‎ 4 掌握一定的书写技能。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 词汇 A) 根据句意和所给中文写出句中所缺的单元 ‎1. J________ is the first month of a year.‎ ‎2. The last month of a year is D__________‎ ‎3. A_______ comes between March and May.‎ ‎4. I was born in F_______ 1993.‎ ‎5. It is usually hot in June, J______ and August.‎ ‎6. A______ is the best season in Beijing.‎ ‎7. The last four months of a year are September, October, N________ and December.‎ ‎8. Please k_______ on the door before you enter the room.‎ ‎9. I like eating r_______ and noodles.‎ ‎10. In s_________, the days start to get warmer and flowers come out. ‎ B) 根据所给汉语写出句中所缺单词 ‎1. There are many ________ （猴子）in the zoo.‎ ‎2. I can not sleep at all. Someone is _______ (喊叫) outside my window.‎ ‎3. My twin brother and I like ________ (冬季)because we like skiing.‎ ‎4. That book is really ________ (有趣的). I would like to read it again.‎ ‎5. What is your ________ (最喜欢的) festival? ‎ ‎6. We have a long _______ (假期) in August. ‎ ‎7. What is the _______ (日期) of your birthday? ‎ ‎8. People like to eat __________(月饼) at Mid-Autumn Festival. ‎ C）根据所给单词的适当形式填空 ‎1. Tom ______ (speak) very good English.‎ ‎2. Jimmy comes from America. He is an _______ (America)‎ ‎3. You can play tricks on your friends at April ________ (Fool) day. ‎ ‎4. It is _______ (wonder) to see you!‎ ‎5. 1 October is our ________ (nation) Day. ‎ ‎6. Thank you for ________ (help) me with my homework.‎ ‎7. Tigers have sharp _______ (tooth).‎ ‎8. How do you like ________ (eat)? ‎ 探 究 板 语法 A) 填空入适当的介词 1. We have lunch at school ________ 12 o’clock.‎ 2. Jack eats some bread and beef ________ breakfast.‎ 块 1. My friends give me some presents _______ Christmas every year.‎ 2. Kitty’s birthday is ________ 15th June.‎ 3. He will have his birthday party ________ the afternoon of May 12th. ‎ 4. Birds fly to the south _______ autumn. ‎ 5. In Hainan‎ ‎Island, it is very warm ________ the evening.‎ 6. He was born _______ 1995. ‎ 7. She always goes out for a walk after supper _______ the evening. ‎ 8. We often watch CCTV News ______ 7 p.m.‎ A) 填入适当疑问代词或副词 1. A: ________ is your book? B: It’s on the desk. ‎ 2. A: ________ does she go to the Reading Club? B: Twice a week.‎ 3. A: _________ do they celebrate Halloween? B: October 31st.‎ 4. A: _________ do people in China go to work? B: By bike.‎ 5. A: ______ students in your class? B: There are twenty students in my class.‎ 6. A: _________ is he? B: He is my cousin.‎ 7. A: _________ does she do? B: She is a worker.’‎ 8. A: ___ do you like Mid-Autumn Festival? B: Because I can eat mooncakes.‎ 9. A: _________ bike is it? B: It’s her bike. ‎ 10. A: _____ is your favourite food, chocolate or hamburger? B: Chocolate!‎ B) 用some和any 填空 ‎1.There are ______ apples and oranges in my bag. What about you? No, there aren’t ______.‎ ‎2.Can I borrow _____ paper? Sorry, you can’t because there isn’t ______ paper ‎3.Do you have ______ milk? Yes, I have ______ now. ‎ ‎4.Would you like _______ candies? No, thank you. ‎ ‎5.Do you want to me to do ______ shopping with you? No, thank you.‎ 检 测 板 块 句型转换 ‎1. The boy in red is my brother. boy is your brother?‎ ‎2. We celebrate Chinese New Year by making and eating dumplings. (对划线部分提问) you celebrate Chinese New Year?‎ ‎3. I can see five pumpkins in the classroom(对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ pumpkins can you see in the classroom?‎ ‎4. The red coat is mine. (对划线部分提问) is the red coat?‎ ‎5. At Mid-Autumn Festival we eat mooncakes. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ you eat at Mid-Autumn Festival?‎ ‎6. I like Mid-Autumn Festival. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ you ?‎ ‎7. There’s some bread on the table. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ is there on the table?‎ ‎8. His father works in an office. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ works in an office?‎ ‎9. The boy looks like a cat. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ the boy like?‎ ‎10. It is Thursday today. (对划线部分提问) is it today.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）7A Unit3-9‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit3 Let’s celebrate Main task 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 复习本单元的知识。‎ 学习 重难点 本单元的词组，句型，语法。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 根据I栏的内容，找出正确的答语。‎ ‎（ ）1、How many apples can you see in the bag? A. Black ‎（ ）2、Who are they? B. It’s On December 31st.‎ ‎（ ）3、What colour is his bike? C. By bike ‎（ ）4、How old are your friends? D.I can see ten.‎ ‎（ ）5、Which book is yours? ‎E. America ‎（ ）6、When is Halloween? F. The red one.‎ ‎（ ）7、Why are you late for school? G. Because I get up late ‎（ ）8、How does your father go to work? H. A banana ‎（ ）9、Where do they come from? I. Eleven ‎（ ）10、What do you want? J. They’re Lucy and Lily 探 究 板 块 选择填空。‎ ‎1.－Merry Christmas!－ .‎ A. Thank you B. The same to you C. That ’s all right D. Not at all ‎2. － there meat in the fridge? －No,but we have fish.‎ A.Is ; any ; some B.Are ; any ; some C .Is ; some ; any D. Are ; some ; any ‎3. There a meeting this evening.‎ ‎ A.will have B.will be C.are going to be D.is going to have ‎4.He finished the book yesterday evening.‎ ‎ A.seeing B.watching C.reading D.looking ‎5.If it tomorrow, I will go by car.‎ ‎ A.rain B.rains C.will rain D.is rain ‎6.Mary arrived in Shanghai the night October 1st.‎ A.on ; of B.on ; in C.at ; / D. in ; /‎ ‎7.April comes after .A.May B.January C.March D. July ‎8.－Sally,do you know the answer this question.－Sorry, I don’t know.‎ A.of B.to C.on D.for ‎9.When we hear our team won the match,all my classmates are very .‎ A.excited B. exciting C. excite D. to excited ‎10.It is fun with my father.‎ A.to go fishing B. go fishing C.going fishing D.to going fishing ‎11.Would you like to drink?‎ A.other something B.something other C.something else D.else something ‎12.Christmas Day is the birthday Jesus Christ.‎ A. of B.from C.for D.by ‎13.There isn’t food in the fridge.‎ A.many B.much C.lot of D.some ‎14.－Who you the presents?－My father does.‎ A. does give B.is give C.give D.gives ‎15.－Where is Alice? －She is in China.‎ A.in holiday B. for holiday C. on holiday D.at holiday 检 测 板 块 根据句意补充单词。‎ ‎1.你会用橘子做一盏灯吗？Can you make a out of an orange.‎ ‎2.八月份你想打算去哪儿度假？Where are you going on in August.‎ ‎3.我将要装扮成美猴王。 I will up as Monkey King.‎ ‎4.我们捉弄他。 We play a trick him.‎ ‎5.我们玩一个叫做“不招待就使坏”的游戏。 We play a game ‘trick or treat’.‎ ‎6.我们穿着特殊的服装，戴着面具。 We wear special costumes with .‎ ‎7.在万圣节我们举行一个聚会。At ,we have a party.‎ ‎8.我在3点钟去看医生。 I am going to see the doctor three o’clock.‎ ‎9.因为中秋节即将来临。 Because the Mid-Autumn Festival is .‎ ‎10.他们的邻居经常给他们一些糖果作为招待。‎ ‎ Their usually give them a treat of some candy.‎ 根据要求转换句型。‎ ‎1.All the students in the room are doing their homework.（用everyone改为单数）‎ ‎ Everyone in the classroom homework.‎ ‎2.I have to wash the dishes because I can’t cook.. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ you have to wash the dishes.‎ ‎3.Jane often has rice for every meal.（改为否定句）‎ ‎ Jane often rice for every meal.‎ ‎4.They like flying kites.（对划线部分提问） do they like ?‎ ‎5.There are seven days in a week.（改成同义句 A week seven days.‎ 延 伸 板 块 阅读理解：‎ A、 仔细阅读后，判断一下所给句子是否正确。正确的写“T”，错误的写“F”。(5分)‎ Every year people celebrate the Spring Festival in China. Usually it is in January or February. It is the most important festival in China. So before it comes, everyone buys many things. and they often make a special kind of food called dumplings. It means “come together”. Parents always buy new clothes for their children and children also buy presents for their parents. On the Spring Festival eve（除夕）, all the family members come back home. They sing, dance and play cards. When they enjoy the meal, they give each other the best wishes for the coming year. They all have a good time.‎ ‎( )⑴The Mid- Autumn Festival is the most important festival in China.‎ ‎( )⑵The Chinese usually have their Spring Festival in December or January.‎ ‎( )⑶The food dumplings means “come together”.‎ ‎( )⑷Fruit is the special kind of food for the Spring Festival in China?‎ ‎( )⑸When Chinese people are having dinner on the Spring Festival eve they sing, dance and play cards.‎ 学 后 反 思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-1‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 4 Food Comic strip ﹠ Welcome to the unit 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎１学习有关食物的词汇．‎ ‎２讨论喜欢与不喜欢的食物．‎ ‎３学会如何表达个人爱好．‎ 学习 重难点 词汇: hamburger, hungry, energy, never, bowl , vegetable, hate, carrot, healthy 词组: have a hamburger ,many times a day , walk to, ‎ 句型:What food do you like? What about …?I like/dislike/love/hate….‎ You never exercise. I need a lot of energy 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 词组翻译：‎ ‎1. 吃一些汉堡______________ 2. 挨饿__________________‎ ‎3. 需要更多锻炼_____________________ 4. 从不锻炼__________________‎ ‎5. 走到那只碗那儿_______________ 6. 一天很多次_________________‎ ‎7. 一个健康人____________ 8. 健康的饮食______________________‎ ‎9. 一碗米饭_________________ 10. 关于不同种类食物的信息 _______________‎ ‎11．不喜欢鱼和蔬菜_____________ 12. 讨厌鸡肉和胡萝卜_________________‎ ‎13. 讨厌吃面包和蛋糕______________ 14. 轮流打扫教室 _________________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 一、听P58录音判断下列句子的正误：‎ ‎1.It’s time for breakfast.( )‎ ‎2.Eddie wants to have a hamburger.( )‎ ‎3.Eddie often exercises.( )‎ ‎4.Hobo is always hungry.( )‎ ‎5.Eddie walks to his bowl many times a day.( )‎ 二、朗读P59B，完成下列句子填空：‎ ‎1. Millie likes_____, _____, and _____. She dislikes______. ‎ ‎2. Daniel likes______. He dislikes____. He hates______.‎ 活动二：要点直击 ‎1.Let’s have a hamburger. 让我们吃个汉堡包吧。‎ ‎“Let’s”是“Let us”的缩写形式，其后接动词原形（即省去to的动词不定式）。以“Let’s”开头的句子为祈使句。例如：‎ Let’s go fishing.让我们去钓鱼吧。 Let’s play badminton. 让我们打羽毛球吧。‎ ‎2.I need a lot of energy. 我需要许多能量。 句中的need作动词，意为“需要”。 例如：‎ ‎ a. need sth. I think we need some Coke. Do you need my help?你需要帮助吗？‎ I don’t need any money.我不需要钱。‎ b. need to do sth I need to keep healthy/fit.‎ c. need sth to do sth. I need vitamins(维生素)to stay/keep healthy.‎ Those ________ need a lot of time _________(dance) every day.‎ Kitty needs a lot of _______(energy能量)_______ (dance) every day. ‎ d. need +v-ing The classroom needs cleaning/to be cleaned.‎ e. need还可作情态动词，常用于否定句。例如：‎ ‎---Must I finish the work today?---No, you needn’t.‎ ‎——我必须今天完成这项任务吗？——不必。‎ ‎3. You never exercise. 你从来不锻炼。‎ ‎(1) never是副词，意为“永不，从不，决不，从未，一点也不”。通常置于行为动词之前、be动词或助动词之后。例如：We never go to school on Sundays.我们星期天从来不上学。I am never late for work.我上班从不迟到。‎ ‎(2) 句中的exercise 作动词，意为“锻炼”。例如：My father exercises in the park every morning. exercise还可作名词，意为“锻炼”。例如：‎ We need some exercise every day.我们需要每天锻炼。‎ 检 测 板 块 一、完成下列句子：‎ ‎1. It’s time for lunch. I’m h___________.‎ ‎2. His watch is broken. He n_______ a new one.‎ ‎3. He is a good student. He is n_______ late for school.‎ ‎4.We must e________ for half an hour every day.‎ ‎5. You must have breakfast every day, because you need e________ to have classes.‎ ‎6. Let us have a h______.‎ ‎7. It is good for your health to eat some fruit and v_______.‎ ‎8. Eddie walks to his bowl many t______ a day.‎ ‎9. He does not like fish, but he l_____ chicken .‎ 二、完成下列句子翻译：‎ ‎1.我每天走路上学，你呢？I____________ every day._________ you?‎ ‎2.我们每天锻炼两次。早上做早操，放学后打篮球。‎ ‎ We__________. In the morning, we_____________. After school, we ______________.‎ ‎3.有些孩子不喜欢吃蔬菜。这不好。Some children_________________. It’s not good.‎ ‎4.你最恨吃什么？我最恨吃鱼，太麻烦了。‎ What_____________________? I hate eating fish. It’s too hard.‎ ‎5.你饿了吗？吃个汉堡吧！_____________________? Have a hamburger, please !‎ 延 伸 板 块 根据句意和汉语注释，写出单词的正确形式：‎ ‎1.There are also two eggs on the table . Do you _______ (需要)more ?‎ ‎2.My sister is very fat because she never ________ (锻炼).‎ ‎3. I don’t like eating fish . My brother _______ (不喜欢) too.‎ ‎4. The young mother often tells her baby to eat more _______ (蔬菜).‎ ‎5. It’s good to drink milk every day because milk can give us a lot of _______ (能量).‎ ‎6. The boy often goes to KFC to eat _________(汉堡).‎ ‎7. It’s ________(午饭时间) . Let’s go to eat some noodles .‎ ‎8. My sister likes sport very much but I ______ (恨) it.‎ ‎9.Amy doesn’t have breakfast in the morning . Now she feels very ______ (饥饿的).‎ ‎10. I _______ (从不) go to that place because it is terrible .‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-2‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 4 Food Reading (A)‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎１学习有关食物的词汇．‎ ‎２整体理解课文，了解Kitty和Daniel 的饮食习惯和生活方式 学习 重难点 词汇: dancer, important, need, easy, tired, keep, fit, seldom, sweet, like, between, meal, sugar, fruit, milk, bread, meat, study, top, basketball, fast, change, plan, juice, health, person, careful ‎ 词组: get tired, keep fit, a top student, have a healthy diet, eat … for breakfast/ lunch/ supper/ dinner, run fast, do exercise, plan to do 句型:It’s adj. (for sb.) to do; It’s time for sb. to do;‎ ‎ Every day, I dance for two hours.‎ ‎ A healthy diet is very important for a dancer.‎ ‎ I need to keep fit. I always eat an apple for breakfast.‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 词组翻译：‎ ‎1. 我们所吃的______________ 2. 想当一名歌星__________________‎ ‎3. 一天跳舞两小时的舞___________________ 4. 从不锻炼__________________‎ ‎5.对一个舞者来说_______________ 6. 需要保持健康_________________‎ ‎7.在每餐之间很少吃零食____________ 8. 太多的糖分______________________‎ ‎9. 提供给我能量_________________ 10. 喜欢吃水果和蔬菜 _______________‎ ‎11．想要保持健康_____________ 12. 早餐吃一个苹果_________________‎ ‎13. 喝点牛奶和果子______________ 14. 饭后吃个橘子 _________________‎ ‎15. 爱学习_______________ 16. 跑得快_________________‎ ‎17. 变得/感到劳累_________________ 18.在我们学校附近_________________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 Answer the following questions :‎ 1. What does Kitty want to be？‎ 2. How long does Kitty dance every day ?‎ 3. How does she feel when she dances ?‎ 4. What is important for her ?‎ 5. What does Kitty seldom eat ? Why ?‎ 6. What does Kitty have for breakfast ?‎ 7. What does she have for dinner ?‎ 8. What does she have after dinner ?‎ 9. Does she eat any sweet snacks ?‎ 10. What kind person Daniel is ?‎ 11. What does Daniel like doing ?‎ 12. Does Daniel have a healthy diet or lifestyle ?‎ 13. Can he run fast ? Why ?‎ 14. What does he plan to do ?‎ 活动二：要点直击 ‎1.A healthy diet healthy: fit adj. 健康的 healthily ( adv.) 健康地health n. 健康 His grandfather is very healthy.It’s important to keep healthy/fit.‎ Vegetables are good for our health. Smoking is bad for your health.‎ You must eat healthily and live healthily. ﹡‎ have good health=be healthy 身体好have poor health=be unhealthy身体不好﹡‎ be in good health身体好be in bad/poor health身体不好 ‎2. It’s easy for me to get tired when I dance. 我跳舞时很容易疲劳。‎ ‎（1）该句的句型结构为“It is adj. for sb. to do sth.”意为“做某事对某人来说…”， it为形式主语，真正的主语为动词不定式to do sth.。因此，原句可改写为：To get tired when I dance is easy for me。‎ It’s not easy to learn English well.= To learn English well is not easy.‎ It is important for us to read English every day.= To read English every day is important for us.‎ It is important for a dancer to be healthy. 对一个舞蹈演员来说，健康是重要的。 ‎ ‎2）句中的get为连系动词，与tired构成系表结构。下列动词get ,keep, sound, feel ,look，stay 也可作连系动词 ‎3.It's time for me to change now. 我现在该改变了。‎ ‎（1）此句型为It's time for +名词/代词+to+动词原形，是一个常用的句型，“某人该做某事了；某人做某事的时间到了；是某人做某事的时候了。‎ It's time to go to school.= It's time for school. 该去上学了。‎ It's time to have supper.= It's time for supper. 是吃晚饭的时候了。‎ 检 测 板 块 根据课文内容填空：‎ Kitty likes to eat cakes, s_____ and C____ , and she s______ ate fruit and v________. She thinks that s____ snacks can give her e_____. Kitty wants to be a d_____, but she always gets t____, so she knows that it is i_________ for a dancer to be h______. Then she changed her d___, she always have some milk and b____ for breakfast, she usually eats m____ and vegetables for dinner. She does not eat sweet s_____ between meals any more. ‎ Daniel likes studying and he is a t___ student at school. B_____, he loved f____ food, especially hamburgers. But he could not run fast, then he starts to e______ every day and swim t____ a week. He has some j____, bread, f___ and vegetables for d_____. He thinks it is important to c______ his diet and l______ . ‎ 延 伸 板 块 边学边练:‎ ‎1.你想成为我们班上的第一名吗? ‎ ‎2.我们需要多锻炼。 ‎ 他需要更多的能量来学好英语。 ‎ ‎3对于他来说认真听老师说是重要的。 ‎ ‎4.不要吃太多的甜食看太多的电视。 ‎ ‎5.我晚餐有时吃饺子。 ‎ ‎6.我们一天做二次眼保健操。 ‎ ‎7. 我该起床了。 ‎ ‎9.他们计划一星期上二节舞蹈课。 ‎ ‎10.他每天锻炼二小时。 ‎ ‎11.我们必须保持健康。 ‎ ‎12.她早餐吃一个鸡蛋，中餐吃肉和蔬菜。 ‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-3‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 4 Food Reading (B)﹠(C)‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1． 能深入理解课文，掌握查找细节、快速浏览、找出重点等阅读技巧；并能用自己的语言复述Millie和Daniel的饮食与生活习惯；‎ ‎2． 能理解并运用文中重点词组及句型.‎ ‎3． 能理解正确的饮食习惯对于健康的重要性,并能通过学习改变自己不良的生活习惯,过更健康的生活.‎ 学习 重难点 复述课文，掌握课文中的短语和句型。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 词组翻译：‎ ‎1. 需要什么做什么______________ 2. 变得/感到疲劳__________________‎ ‎3.跳两小时的舞___________________ 4. 保持健康__________________‎ ‎5.甜食_______________ 6.糖太多 _________________‎ ‎7.玩电脑游戏____________ 8. 和某人聊天______________________‎ ‎9. 在网上_________________ 10. 尖子生_______________‎ ‎11．体育运动_____________ 12. 计划做某事_________________‎ ‎13. 游泳池______________ 14. 每周两次 _________________‎ ‎15. 小心/ 注意_______________ 16. 擅长学习_________________‎ ‎17.有健康的身体______________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 Answer the following questions :‎ 1. How often does Kitty dance ?‎ 2. How often does Kitty eat sweet snacks like cakes and sweets ?‎ 3. What does Daniel like to eat ?‎ 4. How often does Daniel plan to go swimming ?‎ 5. What does Kitty need to be a dancer ?‎ 6. What does Kitty usually eat for dinner ?‎ 7. What are Daniel’s healthy meals ?‎ True or false questions:‎ ‎1.Kitty wants to be a teacher. ‎ ‎2.Kitty is careful with her diet because she wants to be healthy.‎ ‎3. Sweet snacks are healthy because they give people energy.。‎ ‎4. Daniel is a good student.‎ ‎5. Daniel has Coke and hamburgers for lunch.‎ ‎6. Kitty and Daniel have healthy diets and lifestyles.‎ Multiple choice :‎ ‎( ) 1. I have many hobbies _______ reading ,listening to music and playing football.‎ A such B like C as D for ‎( ) 2. After dinner , my classmate Linda usually has an _______ or a bottle of _______.‎ A banana,orange B orange ,juice C pineapple,milk D onion,wine ‎( ) 3. It is easy _____ Bob _____get sleepy.‎ ‎ A to,to B for, to C to , and D for , towards ‎ ‎( ) 4.I can swim, but I ______ swim .‎ ‎ A always B usually C frequency D seldom ‎ ‎( ) 5. Tomorrow , I ______ to go to supermarket . I want to buy _____ and ______.‎ ‎ A plan, three hamburgers, some fish B plan, a hamburger , a fish ‎ ‎ C want, some hamburger, two fishes D want, a hamburger and some fishes ‎( ) 6.Eating too much is _____ for your ______.‎ ‎ A good, health B. bad, healthy C good, healthy D. bad, health ‎ 检 测 板 块 根据句意及所给单词、汉语完成句子：‎ ‎1.She wants to _______ (做) a nurse.‎ ‎2. Sandy is _________. She is in good _________.(健康)‎ ‎3. There ______ (be) some sugar in the cake.‎ ‎4. It’s important for _____ (他) to exercise.‎ ‎5. Daniel likes ____________ (汉堡) and _______ (可乐), so he is __________(health). ‎ ‎6. Kitty keeps fit _________ (dance).‎ ‎7. We need ________ (go) ___________(swim) once a week.‎ ‎8. It’s time for us __________ (change) our diet.‎ ‎9. We need some water _______ (live).‎ ‎10.It’s important _______(drink) a lot of water every day .‎ ‎11.I don’t eat cakes any more and I feel _______(health) now .‎ ‎12.Kitty seldom ______ (have) fruit and vegetables .‎ 翻译下列句子：‎ ‎1对于舞蹈者来说,每天吃健康的食物是很重要的。‎ It is__________ for a _______ to ___ _______ _____ every day.‎ ‎2 我表哥想改变他的生活方式，因为他很容易觉得累。‎ My cousin wants to _______ his _______, because he ____ _____ very easily.‎ ‎3 从那以后，他们不再捉弄他了。‎ After that, they do not _____ ______ ___ her _____ _____.‎ ‎4 我们通常从哪里获取能量？‎ Where do we _______ ___ ______ from?‎ ‎5 如果你想更加健康，那么就多运动吧。‎ ‎________ ___ 30 minutes every day if you _____ __ be ________.‎ 延 伸 板 块 句型转换：‎ ‎1. . Kate dances for two hours every day. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎2 . Daniel plans to have juice and bread for breakfast. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎3. We have a class meeting once a week. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎4. Lily is going to visit her grandparents this Sunday. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎5. Chocolates give us energy. (改为同义句)‎ Chocolates _________ __________ __________ _________.‎ ‎6. What is your favourite food? (同义句)What ________ do you _________ _________?‎ ‎9. Sandy seldom walks to school. (同义句)‎ Sandy‎ seldom _________ _______ school _________ _________.‎ ‎10. It’s suppertime. (同义句) It’s time _________ __________.‎ It’s time _________ __________ __________.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-4‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 4 Food Vocabulary 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1.识别不同的食物 ‎2.能够正确地将食物分类 学习 重难点 词汇：water, round, lemon, mango, tomato, beef, pork, cabbage 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 分类列举食物种类 Food Fruit Vegetable Meat Drink 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 一、根据所给中文单词填空：‎ ‎1、Cody is a lazy dog. It likes (睡觉)very much.‎ ‎2、We need a lot of (牛肉) to eat .‎ ‎3、He often eats (水果) and (蔬菜).‎ ‎4、I like eating (西红柿) very much .‎ ‎5、She didn’t like the salty (鱼) at all .‎ ‎6、There is a shop near my home .I like to buy (零食) here.‎ ‎7、I like (柠檬) best .Do you like them ?‎ ‎8、What are these？They are （芒果）。‎ 二、将P59、P63的词汇按下列类别进行分类：‎ Countable nouns （ 可数名词） :‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ Uncountable nouns （不可数名词）： ‎ ‎ ‎ 三、将下列短文译成中文、并背诵记忆：‎ My diet (日常饮食)‎ ‎ For breakfast, I eat three hamburgers, two eggs, two cakes and two bottles of milk. ‎ I eat some beef ,some chicken, some bread ,some hamburgers and juice for ‎ lunch. ‎ ‎ For supper, I eat some bread some beef and pork, four hamburgers and two mangoes. I hate vegetables.‎ 检 测 板 块 一、首字母填空：‎ 1. Young people like a cold brown drink named c________.‎ 2. C__________ is sweet and brown, many children like it.‎ 3. Chinese people like to have a hot drink----t_____.‎ 4. F_________ lives only in water.‎ 5. A m_________ is a round and sweet cake. People eat it on Mid-autumn Day.‎ 6. L________ is a yellow fruit.‎ 二、根据句意及中文提示填空：‎ 1. I want some _________(猪肉) and __________(胡萝卜).‎ 2. We can buy some _________ (芒果). They are my grandpa’s _________(最喜欢的).‎ 3. We need some ________ (卷心菜) for supper.‎ 4. Would you like some more _________(牛肉)?‎ 5. He has some _______(饼干) and ________ (牛奶) for breakfast.‎ 6. You must have _________(足够的) __________(蔬菜) every day.‎ 7. Lemons and _________ ( 芒果 )are both fruit .‎ 三、句子翻译：‎ ‎1、我们必须当心我们的饮食习惯。‎ ‎2、你多久度假一次？一年一次。‎ ‎3、你爷爷每天锻炼多久？不到一个半小时。‎ ‎4、你哥哥想当什么？当一名警察。‎ ‎5、你妈妈计划晚餐吃什么？吃些鱼，蔬菜和水果。因为这有利于她的健康。‎ ‎6、请你试着找出这些食物的名称。‎ 延 伸 板 块 Game : Odd-one-out In each row, which word does not belong? Why? Circle the world.‎ ‎1 Apple banana carrot orange ‎2 Pork rice beef chicken ‎3 chips chocolate cake cabbage ‎4 noodles rice bread beef ‎ ‎5 Juice chicken milk tea ‎6 Coke juice coffee tomato ‎7 Vegetable fruit watermelon meat ‎ 根据英文解释，写出相应的单词 1．a yellow fruit and it is sour 2. a kind of drink which comes from cows 3. bread with meat and vegetables between it 4. a kind of vegetable which rabbits like very much 5. It is sweet and brown 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-5‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 4 Food Grammar A ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 识别并使用频度副词。‎ 学习 重难点 正确使用频度副词。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 Adverbs of frequency ‎0% 100% ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ seldom ‎ ‎ ‎ often ‎ ‎ ‎ always Never sometimes usually 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 利用频度副词讨论各自的lifestyle My lifestyle ‎ I always go to school by bike.‎ I usually have milk for breakfast.‎ I often eat fruit at lunchtime.‎ I sometimes play badminton in the afternoon.‎ I seldom play football.‎ I never drink Coke.‎ How about your lifestyle?‎ 完成下列句子：‎ ‎1、太阳总是从东方升起,西方落下.‎ The sun _________rises in the east and sets in the west.‎ ‎2、他通常１０点钟睡觉．He ______ goes to bed at ten o’clock.‎ ‎3、他上学经常迟到．He is _____ late for school.‎ ‎4、有时他晚饭后去图书馆.He __________ goes to the library after supper.‎ ‎5、莉莉不常读报．Lily ________reads newspaper.‎ ‎6、我上学从来不迟到．I am _____ late for school.‎ 活动二：要点直击 1. 定义：就是用来表示动作频率的副词 how often things happen.‎ 2. 频率由大到小：always→usually→often→sometimes→seldom→never 3. 频度副词的位置。（1）在be动词后。（2）在实义动词前。（3）sometimes也可放在句首、句子或句末，often也可放在句末。‎ 1. 频度副词的用法。（1）often，always，usually等通常和一般现在时连用，表示现在经常或反复发生的动作。（2）对频度副词提问用how often。‎ 检 测 板 块 一. 根据首字母及句意补全单词 ‎1. The girls o_____ eat vegetables but the boys s _____ eat them .‎ ‎2. Simon is in bad health. He a______ stay at home and watches TV. He n _______ exercises.‎ ‎3. Millie comes to school on time but s_________ she is late .‎ ‎4. Simon’s uncle s ______ visit China .‎ ‎5. I u______ go to school by bike.‎ 二、选择;‎ ‎( ) 1. ______ , I like to stay by myself . ‎ A Always B Sometimes C Never D Usually .‎ ‎( ) 2. I _______ eat onion, it makes me sick. ‎ A never B always C sometimes D like ‎( )3 . I write to my uncle,_______ ‎ A often B sometimes C always D never ‎ ‎( ) 4. ______ I get up early, but I get up late _______.‎ A often, sometimes B Often, sometimes C always, never D usually, sometimes ‎( )5. I _____ eat lemon, is it sweet or acid ? I ____ eat orange, I think I eat it too much.‎ A never, always B seldom, often C never, seldom D seldom, sometimes ‎ 三、对划线部分提问：‎ ‎1.I have meals three times a day .‎ ‎2.Hobo walks to his pool many times a day.‎ ‎3.I’m always hungry .‎ ‎4.He walks to home once a week.‎ ‎5.They sometimes play football.‎ ‎6.You are late six times a year.‎ ‎7.Simon often plays football after school.‎ ‎8.Sandy seldom plays badminton.‎ ‎9. He likes doing his homework.‎ ‎10.Daniel never plays tennis.‎ ‎11.The boys usually swim in the swimming pool.‎ ‎12.Tom never goes swimming.‎ 延 伸 板 块 比较下列句子 ：‎ ‎1.He goes swimming four times a day . eg. She has English lessons twice a day.‎ ‎→How often does he go swimming ‎2.He goes swimming four times a day. ‎ ‎→How many times does he go swimming a day ? eg. She has English lessons twice a day.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-6‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 4 Food Grammar B 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1．识别并使用可数名词和不可属名词；‎ ‎2. 能够将可数名词变成正确的复数形式，包括规则变化和不规则变化。‎ ‎3. 能正确使用量词修饰名词。‎ 学习 重难点 ‎1. 正确可数名词和不可属名词.‎ ‎2. 能正确使用量词修饰名词。‎ ‎3. 可数名词的复数变化形式。‎ ‎4. 词组：in front of, a packet of, a kilo of, ‎ 学 习 过 程 说明 预 习 板 块 Can you help them find the right family?‎ apple orange cup plate egg dish tea salt cake beef bread cake hamburger potato Coke bowl juice meat milk rice t omato ‎ ‎ ‎ Countable nouns ‎ Uncountable nouns ‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 写出下列单词的复数：‎ cake story glass wish ‎ watch box radio potato ‎ mango shelf knife man ‎ woman foot tooth sheep ‎ fish Chinese ‎ 活动二、要点直击 名词复数的变化规则：‎ 一般情况直接加s。（S在清辅音后读[S]，在浊辅音和元音后读[Z]）如：books, pens , boys.‎ ‎(2)以s,, x, ch, sh结尾的名词加es.（es读[Iz]）如：buses , boxes ‎(3)以“辅音+y”结尾的名词改Y为I,再加es.(es读[z]) 如:families ‎(4) 以f , fe结尾的名词改f, fe结尾的名词改f , fe为ves.（ves读[vz]）如：knives ‎ ‎(5)以o 结尾的名词加es或加s.（es 读[z]；s读[z]）如：tomatoes, potatoes, radios , kilos.‎ ‎② 少数名词的复数形式是不规则的。 man — men woman — women child — children sheep — sheep ‎③ 表示国籍的名词，有的在词尾加－s，表示该国的人，如an American—three Americans；有的单、复数形式相同，如a Chinese — four Chinese等。‎ 不定冠词 a/an ‎（1）概述：a/an 常用于可数名词单数前，起泛指作用。an用在元音之前，如：an “s” , an hour. a用在辅音之前，如：a book, a useful book;‎ ‎（2）用法：‎ A．表示数量“一个”.如：I have a brother and two sisters.‎ B. 表示“每一个”。如：we go home twice a week. ‎ C. 表示“某一个”。如：A girl often comes to see them.‎ D. 表示一类人、物。如：This is a chair and that’s a desk.‎ E．用在习惯用语中。如: a lot of , have a talk, have a rest, have a good time. ‎ 检 测 板 块 ‎（一）词组互译：‎ a glass of milk a bowl of rice ‎ a cup of tea a kilo of meat ‎ a packet of salt a bag of sugar ‎ a piece of bread a bottle of water ‎ 一些牛奶 一个小时 ‎ 两袋大米 五公斤肉 ‎ 几袋盐 一杯茶 ‎ 三碗汤 一罐糖 ‎ 两瓶牛奶 一篮水果 ‎ 三瓶苹果汁 ________________ 三盒鸡蛋 ________________‎ ‎（二）用a or an填空：‎ ‎____ banana _____ egg _____ orange _____ cake ‎_____ lemon _____ apple _____ hamburger ‎(三) 写出下列名词的复数形式：‎ ‎1. poster ________ 2. carrot _______ 3. story __________ ‎ ‎4. monkey __________ 5. try __________ 6. holiday __________‎ ‎7. glass __________ 8. dish _________ 9. couch __________ ‎ ‎10. box _____ 11. radio _________ 12. tomato ________ ‎ ‎13. kilo _________ 14. zoo _______ 15. mango ________‎ ‎16. knife ________ 17. shelf ______ 18. wife ________‎ ‎19. woman ______ 20. foot ______ 21. sheep _______‎ ‎22. tooth ______ 23. Chinese ____ 24. child _________‎ ‎25. fish ___________ 26. potato _____ 27. apple tree _______ ‎ ‎28. woman teacher _______________‎ 延 伸 板 块 用所给单词的适当形式填空:  1). They sometimes go roller ________ ( skate). 2). Chinese like eating _______( noodle) on their birthdays.  3). Are there any ________( knife) in the shop .  4). We will buy some ______ ( potato) and _______( tomato).  用 a /an 填空:  1. There is _______ ‘ h ‘ and ‘ s ‘ in the work ‘ fish ‘.  2. Do you have ______ pen?  3. I want to eat _______ orange.  4. There are 60 minutes in _______ hour.  5. Does your father work in ______ university? 翻译下列句子： 1、李小姐经常喝两杯绿茶。 Miss Li often_____________________________. 2、我妈妈需要买三袋盐。My mother __________________________________. 3、中秋节我们将吃5盒月饼。On Mid-Autumn Festival ____________________ 4、厨房里有两篮 土豆。There are two ____________________in the kitchen. 5、他早餐吃几片面包。He _______________________________.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-7‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 4 Food Grammar C ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1．识别there be句型和have/has的区别。 ‎ ‎2. 熟练掌握 there be句型，包括肯定、否定和疑问形式。‎ 学习 重难点 there be句型的应用。‎ 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 用there is/are或have/has的正确形式填空：‎ ‎1). How many days _______ in a month? _______thirty or thirty-one days in a month.‎ ‎ 2). How many legs ______ the chair _______ ? It ______ only two . It is broken.‎ ‎ 3). What’s in the shopping mall ? _______ a supermarket, some restaurants and different kinds of shops.‎ ‎ 4). Look! The clocks _______ round faces and on the faces _______ three legs.‎ ‎5). Can you see the tall building in the centre of the city? It _______ 38 floors _______ many companies and shops in it .‎ ‎6). ________ some chicken on the plate.. _______ any noodles in the bowl .‎ ‎7). ______ you ______ much homework to do every day ? Yes. ______ no time for us to ‎ ‎ watch TV.‎ ‎8). Who _______ a Chinese-English dictionary? Nobody________ . I think ______some in the teacher’s office.‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 Do we use ‘ there be’ or ‘ have/has ’ here?‎ ‎1. He _______ a new room._______a new room in his house.‎ ‎2. -How many doctors _______ in this hospital? -It ______about 800 doctors.‎ ‎3. I ______ a new pen, but _______ no ink in it.‎ ‎4.Do you _______ any bananas? Yes, _______some in the fridge.‎ ‎5.-Do you_______ any sisters?-Yes, I _______ a sister. _________ 4 people in my family.‎ 活动二：要点直击 ‎1．there be结构主要表示“某地（某时）有…”表示事物的存在。There be中的动词be (is, are)是“存在”的意思。be (is, are)的形式取决于后面的名词。其结构如下： 　‎ ‎“There be+名词（主语）＋地点状语或时间状语。” ‎ There is + a singular noun(单数名词）或an uncountable noun（不可数名词）‎ There are + a plural noun e.g. There is an old man sitting on the chair.‎ ‎ There are three butterflies in this picture. ‎ 在there be 结构中一定要注意谓语就近的原则。There be句型中的be动词形式由最靠近它的名词决定。‎ e.g. There is a bottle of water and two apples in her bag.‎ There are two books and a pen on the desk.‎ There be的句型转换：‎ 一般疑问句及其回答：‎ Is (Are) there...? Yes, there is. No, there isn't.‎ 否定句： There is (are) not...‎ 检 测 板 块 一、翻译下列句子：‎ ‎1、我们学校有许多老师。‎ ‎2、瓶中有一些水吗？没有。‎ ‎3、“use”中有一个“u”和一个“s”。‎ ‎4、我有5个苹果，他有3个橘子。‎ ‎5、桌子上有一个西红柿和一些蔬菜。‎ ‎6、包里有一些面包和香蕉。‎ ‎7、我有二个弟弟。我家有五口人。‎ ‎8. 桌上有一些面包.‎ ‎9. 他的笔袋里有一块橡皮. ‎ ‎10. 我们学校有两个网球场. （tennis courts）‎ ‎ 二、 用所给词的适当形式填空：‎ ‎1. _________(not, give) ________(he) these __________(mango).‎ ‎2 Are you looking forward to _________ (go) home?‎ ‎3. This pancake tastes __________(salt).‎ ‎4. He wants _________(be) ___________(health), so he must change his diet.‎ ‎4. Tom seldom ________(eat) ice creams.‎ ‎5. You aren’t fit at all! You need ___________(exercise) more.‎ ‎6. On Sundays, he has enough time _________(chat) with his friends.‎ ‎7. Thanks for ________(make) the delicious food for me.‎ ‎8. Here __________(be) some bread for you.‎ ‎9. What shall we do? What about __________(walk) the dog?‎ 延 伸 板 块 用there be句型的正确形式完成一组新对话。‎ ‎ Kitty: I am hungry.‎ Amy: Me too.‎ Kitty: _________ a restaurant around here?‎ Amy: I don’t think so. ________ not one that I know of.‎ Kitty: Then _________a supermarket nearby?‎ Amy: Let me think. Well, ________ a big supermarket at the end of this street.________ a lot of things we can eat there.‎ Kitty: That’s great, but _______always many people there too?‎ Amy: I think so.‎ Kitty: Oh, I hate too many people. Look, _______ a snack bar over there. Shall we go there?‎ Amy: OK.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-8‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 4 Food Integrated skills ‎ 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1．能熟练掌握和运用一些表达频率的单词，词组和句型。通过完成一张调查问卷获取同伴的相关信息。‎ ‎2．能从听力材料中获取相关有用的信息，能用已经掌握的信息来完成调查问卷并且根据调查的结果用自己的语言来描写同伴的饮食和生活习惯。在同伴相互交流的基础上能灵活运用本单元学过的知识，进行听、说、读、写的训练。‎ ‎3．通过比较和学习，养成良好的饮食和生活习惯。‎ 学习 重难点 词组: change your diet need to exercise more watch less TV ‎ three to six times week less than more than 2 hours of TV 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 一、翻译词组：‎ ‎1、一点也不健康 ________ 2、少看些电视 ________________‎ ‎3、 尽力变得更健康 ____________ 4、需要更多锻炼 ________________‎ ‎5 、看两个人小时电视 ________ 6、祝你学习英语好运 __________‎ ‎7、感觉更健康 __________ ‎ 二、根据句子的意思和所给的单词的首字母填空: 1. A q______ is a list of questions for finding out information. 2. Do you know anything about the Get F_____ Club. ‎ ‎3. Dogs like eating b_______.‎ ‎4. His father is l_____ than fifty years old.‎ ‎5. Work in pairs and ask your p______ the following questions.‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 同桌间就就下列问题进行对话操练。 ‎ ‎1. What food do you often have?‎ ‎2. What activities do you often do?‎ ‎3. How do you go to school every day?‎ ‎4. How much sleep do you have every day ?‎ ‎ (have …hours of sleep)‎ 活动二：要点直击 ‎ 1. How often do they exercise? 他们多长时间锻炼一次？‎ ‎（1）How often常用于对频率的提问，意为“多长时间一次”，其答语通常是once a week, three times a month, sometimes等表示频的副词及短语。例如：---How often do you go to see your parents?---Twice a month. ‎ How often does your cousin play computer games? ---Three times a week How often do you go fishing?---Never, but my father does once a week.‎ ‎（2）How long询问做某事持续的时间，答语中的时间常用介词for 引出。如：How long do you watch TV every night?‎ I watch TV for 2-4 hours every night.‎ ‎（3）How much常用来对不可数名词的数量提问，也可用于询问价钱，还可询问抽象名词或表示事物总称的名词的数。How much TV do you watch every day?  More than 3 hours / Less than 4 hours /  2—4 hours ‎（4）less than three times a week. 一周不到三次 less than，意思是“不到；少于”，与more than相反。more than=over less than two weeks. 不到两周。more than / over three hours. 三个多小时;‎ many /much的比较级是 more little（比较级）less There are more than 50 students in our class. He watches TV less than an hour every day.‎ ‎（5）three to six hours 三到六小时 three to six times三到六次 ‎2. You are not fit at all.你一点也不健康。‎ ‎（1）at all意为“一点也（不）”，常与not连用，构成句型not…at all。例如：I’m not tired at all. ---Are you hungry?---Not at all. not与at all连在一起，用来表示“答谢”。例如： --Thank you.--- Not at all. (=You’re welcome.)‎ ‎（2）句中的fit是形容词，意为“健康的，结实的”，相当于healthy。例如：If you want to keep fit, you should take more exercise.‎ ‎3 .Congratulations! 祝贺你（们）！‎ Congratulations是名词，常用复数形式，其后可接to sb.或on doing sth.，意为“向（某人）祝贺（某事）”。例如：‎ Congratulations to you on winning the match.‎ Congratulations on your success(成功).‎ 检 测 板 块 ‎ 按照要求改写句子:  1. How much TV do you watch every day?( 改为同义句)   _____ ______ do you watch T V every day?‎ ‎2. He doesn’t sleep more than ten hours every night? (改为同义句) ‎ He sleeps ______ ______ ten hours every night?‎ ‎3. They always eat fruit and vegetables. (提问) ‎ ‎_____ ______ _____ they eat fruit and vegetables? ‎ 句子翻译：‎ 1. 我们每个人每天花不到三个小时做作业。‎ 2. 他们应该少看电视。它对他们的眼睛不利。‎ 3. 如果你多锻炼，你会感觉好多的。‎ 4. 你必须当心你的健康。‎ 5. 那个小男孩一点都不想喝汤。‎ 延 伸 板 块 补全对话 Sandy: ________ _________ do you exercise? Tommy: Less than twice a week. Sandy: ________ _________ do you eat fruit and vegetables? Tommy: Very often. Sandy: ________ _________ do you do your homework? Tommy: Less than two hours. Sandy: ________ _________ TV do you watch every day? Tommy: More than an hour.‎ 学后 反思 盱眙县第三中学有效教学目标导学案（学生用）Unit4-9‎ 学习 内容 ‎7A‎ Unit 4 Food speak up﹠ Main task ﹠ checkout 课型 新课 编写人 高绍春 审核人 艾锋 年级 ‎7‎ 学科 英语 学习 目标 ‎1．  能看懂食物营养价值表。‎ ‎2．  将关于饮食和生活方式的信息用文章形式表达出来。‎ ‎3．  能熟练掌握与本单元话题有关的词汇和语法。‎ ‎4．  对本单元进行回顾和复习。‎ 学习 重难点 词组: stay healthy orange juice start the day green tea 学 习 过 程 说 明 预 习 板 块 翻译下列句子：‎ ‎1.I need vitamins to stay healthy.‎ ‎ 2.This helps me start the day.‎ ‎ 3.I sometimes have rice with fish and an apple for lunch.‎ ‎ 4.This meal gives me energy for the afternoon and for playing volleyball.‎ ‎ 5.It is also important to drink lots of water every day.‎ ‎6.You can drink it without getting fat.‎ 翻译词组。‎ ‎1）需要许多能量_______________ 2）一杯橘汁_______________‎ ‎3）对...有益_______________ 4）保持健康_______________‎ ‎5）每天多喝水很重要_______________ 6）喝水而不发胖______________ 7) 给我打排球的能量_______________ 8）需要维他命保持健康 ___________‎ 探 究 板 块 活动一：预习交流 1）Vegetables and fruit are good for us because there are lots of _________(维他命) in them. 2) There are lots of calories in ______(花生)，but I like eating them very much. 3) It’s not good to go to school ______(不，没有) breakfast. 4) I often have ______(汤), meat and vegetables for dinner. 5）The _______(number) of the students in the hall is 200. 活动二 ：要点直击 1.How do you like sth ? =What do you think of sth ? Very much 2.I like hamburgers but I don’t eat them any more.我喜欢汉堡包，不过我不再吃了。 not…any more意为“不再……”。not--- any more=no more not--- any longer=no longer 不再He is no longer/more a child.=He is not a child any more/longer. I love hamburgers but I don’t eat them any more. 仿照例句翻译： 1.我再也不迟到了。_______________________________________________. 2.他再也不完电脑游戏了。___________________________________________ . 3.Good luck with your new diet and lifestyle. 愿新的日常饮食及生活方式为你带来好运（成功）。（1）luck是名词，意为“运气、幸运”。例如：He always has good luck.他总很走运。I wish you luck. 祝你幸运。 （2）若表示“祝（你）好运；祝（你）顺利；祝（你）平安！”，则表达为：Good luck!Good luck 后接人时用 Good luck to sb.，Good luck后接sth.时用Good luck with sth. 例如：Good luck to you! Good luck with your English! 4.. There are no calories in water, so you can drink it without getting fat.‎ ‎ 水中没有热量，所以你喝了不会发胖。without 是“没有，不”的意思。‎ 检 测 板 块 按要求转换句型练习。‎ ‎ 1.There are some cakes in the box .( 改为一般疑问句和单数句)‎ ‎2.I want to have some lemons .(改为同义句) ‎ ‎3.Those are apples .(改为单数)‎ ‎ 4.Eddie loves chocolate because it is very sweet. （对划线部分提问,下同）‎ ‎5.She sleeps for 10 hours a day. ‎ ‎6.Millie goes dancing twice a week.‎ ‎ 7.There are three glasses of milk on the table. ‎ ‎8. He needs a kilo of meat .‎ 选择题:‎ ‎（ ）1、It takes me half hour to do my homework every day.‎ A、a B、an C、the D、/‎ ‎（ ）2、I often get up 8:00 Sundays.‎ A、in, on B、at, in C、at, on D、in, in ‎（ ）3、— does your mother go for a walk？—Every afternoon.‎ A、How long B、How much C、How often D、How many ‎（ ）4、Would you like another cup of milk? --__________. I’m full now.‎ ‎ A. No, thank you. B. All right. C. That’s all right. D. Never mind.‎ ‎（ ）5、You should do more _____. Don’t always sit at the desk busy doing your ____.‎ A. exercise, exercises B. exercise, exercise C. exercises, exercise D. exercises, exercises ‎（ ）6、It takes Mr. Wang 20 minutes lunch every day.‎ A、cook B、to cook C、cooking D、cooks ‎（ ）7、I have three sisters. They are all .‎ A、woman teacher B、woman teachers C、women teacher D、women teachers ‎（ ）8、I can't mend the car your help.‎ A、of B、with C、without D、for ‎（ ）9、You look than before.‎ A、health B、healthy C、healthiest D、healthier ‎（ ）10、Is watching TV too bad your health?‎ A、much, to B、much, for C、many, to D、many, for 延 伸 板 块 翻译句子：‎ ‎1. 甜零食对身体有害。‎ ‎2. 吃水果对你的身体有好处。‎ ‎3. 他常不吃早饭就来上学。（without）‎ ‎ 4.李雷没有他父亲的帮助也能完成家庭作业。‎ ‎ 5. 鱼儿离不开水。‎ ‎6.祝你下次考试一切顺利。‎ 学后 反思